JP5428060B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified according to the establishment of a starting condition, and the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is predetermined. When the specific display result is obtained, the game is controlled to a specific game state advantageous to the player, and after the specific game state ends, the first game state or the second game advantageous to the player than the first game state The present invention relates to a gaming machine that shifts to a state.

  As generally known as this type of gaming machine, for example, as in a pachinko gaming machine, each can be identified in accordance with the establishment of a starting condition (a game ball has won a start winning opening) A variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information (symbols) is provided, and when the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is a predetermined specific display result (a jackpot display result) , Control to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and after the specific gaming state ends, the first gaming state (normal gaming state), or the first gaming state advantageous to the player over the first gaming state There are those that shift to two game states (probability change state, short time state, etc.).

  As such a gaming machine, there is one that performs a re-lottery effect (promotion effect) during a jackpot game, informing whether or not a promiscuous state is to be given after the jackpot game ends (Patent Document) 1).

  In addition, such a gaming machine determines whether or not a random number in the start memory or a random number acquired by a newly generated start winning is a hit during the big hit, There has been a so-called pre-reading notice effect that informs the player that the jackpot random number is included in the jackpot screen or the like during suspension (Patent Document 2).

JP 2006-61313 A (paragraph number 0007) Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-230117 (paragraph numbers 0027 and 0028)

  However, if the promotion effect as shown in Patent Document 1 and the prefetching notice effect as shown in Patent Document 2 can be executed together in the specific game state, the effect in the specific game state becomes too complicated, Instead of feeling joyful that the player is controlled to a specific gaming state, the player is confused by the complicated performance. As a result, there is a problem that the interest of the player is reduced simply by using such effects in combination.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player when a specific gaming state is entered.

Specific examples of means for solving the problems and their effects

(1) A plurality of types of identification information (first special symbol, second symbol) that can be identified according to the establishment of the start condition (the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening 14). There is provided a fluctuation display means for performing a fluctuation display of a special symbol, and the display result of the identification information derived to the fluctuation display means (the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b) is specified in advance. When a display result (a jackpot display result) is reached, control is made to a specific gaming state (a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player, and after the specific gaming state is finished, the first gaming state (normal gaming state), or the A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that shifts to a second gaming state (probability change state, short time state) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state,
When the start condition is satisfied, the pending memory (first hold memory, the second hold store) information for performing variable display of the identification information holding memory means for storing the (first hold memory buffer, the second hold Storage buffer),
Predetermining means for deciding whether or not to display the identification information as a specific display result when starting the variable display of the identification information based on the holding storage (in the game control microcomputer 560 of FIG. A portion for executing S61, S62, and S73);
When the start condition is satisfied, the start condition satisfaction determination means for determining whether or not the display result by the variation display of the identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result. (Portion for executing S217A and S217B in FIG. 17 in the game control microcomputer 560);
The specific game based on the fact that the specific display result is derived without notifying the transition to the second game state (promoting to the probable change state) at the timing (big hit timing) when the specific display result is derived. During the specified period (during the big hit round, during the ending production) from the start of the state to the end of the specific gaming state and the start of the first display of the change, a predetermined production (no production in FIG. 46 (ending promotion), story) A notification (promotion effect) is performed by performing an effect, a chance notification effect, and a complete notification effect (FIGS. 52 to 56), transition notification means (S1910, S1923 in FIG. 47, S1989 in FIG. 48),
As the hold memories stored in the hold memory means, if it contains the said hold memory is a determination result that the specific display result by the start condition is satisfied when the determination means, wherein the specific period (the promotion effect is performed It said predetermined effect the same effect as the same timing) and the timing of (no rendition of FIG. 46 (ending promotion), story effect, chances notification effect, full announcement effect) to notify by performing (suspended jackpot notification effect) On-hold specific display result notifying means (S1910, S1915, S1916, S1923 in FIG. 47, S1980, S1985, S1989 in FIG. 48, S704, S706, S707 in FIG. 49, S714 in FIG. 50) ;
On the condition that the predetermined effect is performed in the transition notification means, the control for restricting the on-hold specific display result notification means from performing the same effect as the predetermined effect; and the on-hold specific display result notification A restricting means (S1976 in FIG. 48) for performing at least one of the control for restricting the transition notifying means from performing the predetermined effect on condition that the same effect as the predetermined effect is performed in the means. Is provided.

According to such a configuration, notification is not made at the timing when the specific display result is derived, and the specific gaming state ends from the start of the specific gaming state based on the specific display result being derived, and the first variable display starts. The notification of shifting to the second gaming state is performed by performing a predetermined effect within a specific period until the game is performed. Further, when the hold memories stored in the hold memory means includes pending stores a judgment result of the specific display result by the starting condition is satisfied when the determination means, the predetermined within a specific period of time predetermined effect is performed By performing the same production as the production, it is informed that the hold storage that is the determination result as the specific display result is included. As a result, when the player enters a specific gaming state in which the player feels joyful, these two types of notifications are performed in the same effect, so that the player only has to pay attention to the same effect and is advantageous to the player. Since it can be easily recognized by the production without being confused as to whether or not it will be in a certain state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when entering the specific gaming state. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent useless effects from being performed by the restricting means.

(2) A plurality of the same effects performed by the transition notification means or the in-hold specific display result notification means including a first timing (execution timing of the ending effect) and a second timing different from the first timing. Timing selection means (S986 in FIG. 45, S1977 to S1985 in FIG. 48) for selecting at which timing of the timing (execution timing in the round)
The timing selecting means selects a predetermined timing among the plurality of timings when the same effect is performed by the transition notification means and when the in-hold specific display result notification means is performed. (For the promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the ratio of the effect pattern in which the promotion effect is not performed during the ending is higher than the ratio of the effect pattern performed in the ending) 90% (total of 90% of story, chance announcement, and complete announcement), and the promotion effect is higher during the round than at the ending. As shown in the figure, when it is determined to be executed by the fifth round, a notification effect may be executed during the round. 50, when it is determined to be executed from the sixth round to the fifteenth round, the notification effect is performed only during the ending, so the promotion effect is executed during the round as compared to the on-hold big hit notification effect. The percentage that is executed is high, and the percentage that is executed at the time of ending is low. However, when it is executed as the on-hold big hit notification effect, it is executed only in the seventh round as shown in S706. Therefore, the on-hold big hit notification effect is the seventh chance notification compared with the promotion effect. The rate of execution during the round is high, and for complete notifications, the fourth, eighth, eleventh, Although it is executed in any one of the rounds 16, it is executed only in the eighth round as shown in S707 when it is executed as the on-hold jackpot notification effect. There is a high percentage of executing full notifications during the eighth round.

  According to such a configuration, the first timing and the first timing are the timings for performing the same effect when the same effect is performed by the transition notification unit and when the same indication is performed by the on-hold specific display result notification unit. The ratio of selecting a predetermined timing among a plurality of timings different from the second timing is different. Thereby, it is possible to predict which of the notification means performs the notification based on the timing at which the same effect is performed.

( 3 ) The fluctuation display means includes:
First variation display means (first special symbol display 8a) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of first identification information (first special symbols) that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition;
Based on the establishment of the second start condition, second variation display means (second special symbol display 8b) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of second identification information (second special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other. Including
When the display result of the identification information derived to the first variation display means or the second variation display means becomes the specific display result, the specific gaming state is controlled,
The holding storage means
First hold storage means (first hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (first hold storage) for performing variable display of the first identification information when the first start condition is satisfied;
Second hold storage means (second hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (second hold storage) for performing variable display of the second identification information when the second start condition is satisfied,
The determination means when the starting condition is satisfied,
When the first start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means becomes the specific display result. Means for determining when the first start condition is satisfied (S217A);
When the second start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means becomes the specific display result. A second start condition satisfaction determination means (S217B),
After the end of the specific gaming state, the second gaming state is set as the second gaming state, and the second gaming state (probability changing state, time saving state) in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the execution frequency of the variation display of the second identification information increases. ) Second gaming state control means (S167, S170 in FIG. 26, S98 in FIG. 22) for controlling the gaming state;
At least in the second gaming state, when the on- hold storage is stored in both the first on-hold storage means and the second on-hold storage means, the second identification information is displayed more than the variation display of the first identification information. Fluctuation display control means for preferentially executing the variable display of the identification information (if the second reserved memory number is not zero in S52 of FIG. 20 in the game control microcomputer 560, S53 is preferentially executed and the special symbol pointer is executed. And a value indicating “second” is set, and the process after S55 is executed to display the variation display of the second special symbol),
The on-hold specific display result notifying means includes a hold memory that is a determination result that is determined as the specific display result by the second start condition satisfaction determination means as the hold memory stored in the second hold storage means. In such a case, it is notified that the specific display result has been determined by performing the same effect as the predetermined effect within the specific period (in the big hit gaming state, at the time of winning for the first reserved memory by S216A) Since the effect process is limited, the on-hold internal jackpot notification effect is performed for the winning determination result for the second reserved memory).

According to such a configuration, than the variation display of the first identification information performed by the hold memories stored in the first holding memory means, first performed by holding the memory stored in the second holding memory 2 in the configuration variable display of the identification information it is performed with priority, as the hold memories stored in the second holding memory means, a particular display result to the determination result in a hold memory by the second start condition satisfied when judging means Is included in the predetermined period during which the notification of the transition to the second gaming state by the transition notification unit may be performed in a predetermined period, the reserved storage unit may include the pending store a determination result of the specific display result is informed as hold memories stored in. As a result, regarding the configuration in which the variation display of the first identification information and the variation display of the second identification information are performed, when the player enters a specific gaming state in which the player feels joy, these two types of notification are performed with the same effect. Therefore, simply paying attention to the same performance, it will be easy to recognize whether it will be advantageous to the player, improving the player's interest when entering a specific gaming state Can be made. Furthermore, it is notified that the determination as the specific display result has been made only for the hold storage stored in the second hold storage means that is executed with priority on the variable display. When the player recognizes that the display result of the variation display of the first identification information may become the specific display result during the specific game state, the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or after the end of the specific game state and / or Until the player is aware that there is a possibility that a specific display result will be obtained when the game state is controlled so that the frequency of execution of the display of the second identification information is increased. The specific game state is continuously generated by aiming only at the establishment of the second start condition in which the variable display is executed in preference to (in more detail, the specific game state is generated by the establishment of the second start condition and ended. It is conceivable that more than the expected number of prize balls is deliberately targeted by a technical intervention in which a specific gaming state is generated again when the first start condition that recognizes the possibility of a specific display result is established later. On the other hand, since it is informed that the determination as the specific display result has been made only for the on- hold storage stored in the second on-hold storage means in which the variable display is executed with priority, the notification is not performed. It is possible to prevent a specific game state from being continuously generated by the player's technical intervention without digesting the reserved memory and deliberately aiming for more than an expected number of prize balls.

( 4 ) Moreover, about the above-mentioned (1)-( 3 ), you may be limited to the following structures.

The fluctuation display means includes
First variation display means (first special symbol display 8a) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of first identification information (first special symbols) that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition;
Based on the establishment of the second start condition, second variation display means (second special symbol display 8b) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of second identification information (second special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other. Including
When the display result of the identification information derived to the first variation display means or the second variation display means becomes the specific display result, the specific gaming state is controlled,
The holding storage means
First hold storage means (first hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (first hold storage) for performing variable display of the first identification information when the first start condition is satisfied;
Second hold storage means (second hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (second hold storage) for performing variable display of the second identification information when the second start condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is satisfied, the determination means is configured to display the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means when the first start condition is satisfied. A first start condition satisfaction determination means (S217A) for determining whether or not
When the second start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means becomes the specific display result. A second start condition satisfaction determination means (S217B),
After the end of the specific gaming state, the second gaming state is controlled to a gaming state (probability changing state, time saving state) in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second identification information is increased. Second gaming state control means (S167, S170 in FIG. 26, S98 in FIG. 22),
At least in the second gaming state, when the on- hold storage is stored in both the first on-hold storage means and the second on-hold storage means, the second identification information is displayed more than the variation display of the first identification information. Fluctuation display control means for preferentially executing the variable display of the identification information (if the second reserved memory number is not zero in S52 of FIG. 20 in the game control microcomputer 560, S53 is preferentially executed and the special symbol pointer is executed. A value indicating “second” is set in the part, and the process after S55 is executed to execute the variation display of the second special symbol),
After 1 pending memory is stored in the first holding storage unit or the second holding memory means, variable display performed by the hold memory of the 1 is performed before the start, the one pending memory Separately, in the pre-execution change display based on the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means, the pre-execution change for informing the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) about the one hold storage. Preliminary notifying means (in the production control microcomputer 100, by executing S1802 in FIG. 35 to determine the presence / absence and production mode of the continuous notice production and executing S1848 in FIG. 42, the production shown in FIGS. The part that performs the continuous notice effect of the aspect), and
In the specific gaming state, a specific game state determination limiting means (game control micro) for restricting execution of the determination performed by the first start condition establishment time determining means for notifying the pre-reading notice by the pre-execution change notice notification means. The computer 560 is further provided with a portion that controls not to shift to S217A when it is determined as Y in S216A of FIG.

  According to such a configuration, in the specific gaming state, the execution of the determination made by the first start condition satisfaction determination unit for the notification of the pre-reading notification by the pre-execution change notification unit is limited. When the player recognizes that the display result of the variation display of the first identification information may become the specific display result during the specific game state, the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or after the end of the specific game state and / or Until the player is aware that there is a possibility that a specific display result will be obtained when the game state is controlled so that the frequency of execution of the display of the second identification information is increased. The specific game state is continuously generated by aiming only at the establishment of the second start condition in which the variable display is executed in preference to (in more detail, the specific game state is generated by the establishment of the second start condition and ended. It is conceivable that more than the expected number of prize balls is deliberately targeted by a technical intervention in which a specific gaming state is generated again when the first start condition that recognizes the possibility of a specific display result is established later. On the other hand, in the specific gaming state, the execution of the decision made by the first start condition satisfaction determining means for the notification of the pre-reading notice by the pre-execution fluctuation notice notification means is limited. By making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variation display of the identification information will be the specific display result, a specific gaming state is continuously generated by the technical intervention of the player, and deliberately more than the expected number of prize balls It can prevent being targeted.

( 5 ) Moreover, about the above-mentioned (1)-( 4 ), you may be limited to the following structures.

The fluctuation display means includes
First variation display means (first special symbol display 8a) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of first identification information (first special symbols) that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition;
Based on the establishment of the second start condition, second variation display means (second special symbol display 8b) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of second identification information (second special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other. Including
When the display result of the identification information derived to the first variation display means or the second variation display means becomes the specific display result, the specific gaming state is controlled,
The holding storage means
First hold storage means (first hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (first hold storage) for performing variable display of the first identification information when the first start condition is satisfied;
Second hold storage means (second hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (second hold storage) for performing variable display of the second identification information when the second start condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is satisfied, the determination means is configured to display the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means when the first start condition is satisfied. A first start condition satisfaction determination means (S217A) for determining whether or not
When the second start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means becomes the specific display result. A second start condition satisfaction determination means (S217B),
Second gaming state control means for controlling, as the second gaming state, after the completion of the specific gaming state, a gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variable display of the second identification information is increased. (S167 and S170 in FIG. 26, S98 in FIG. 22),
At least in the second gaming state, when the on- hold storage is stored in both the first on-hold storage means and the second on-hold storage means, the second identification information is displayed more than the variation display of the first identification information. Fluctuation display control means for preferentially executing the variable display of the identification information (if the second reserved memory number is not zero in S52 of FIG. 20 in the game control microcomputer 560, S53 is preferentially executed and the special symbol pointer is executed. A value indicating “second” is set in the part, and the process after S55 is executed to execute the variation display of the second special symbol),
After 1 pending memory is stored in the first holding storage unit or the second holding memory means, variable display performed by the hold memory of the 1 is performed before the start, the one pending memory separately in the first hold storage means or earlier execution variable display based on the second holding storage means stored pending stored, previously run variation notice informing means for informing the read-ahead notice of pending memory of the 1 (effect and The control microcomputer 100 executes S1802 in FIG. 35 to determine the presence / absence and effect mode of the continuous notice effect and execute S1848 in FIG. 42, thereby performing the continuous notice effect in the effect modes shown in FIGS. Part to execute)
In the second gaming state, second game state determination limit means (game control microcomputer 560) for restricting execution of the determination performed by the first determination means for notification of the prefetch notice by the advance execution change notice information means. In step S215A, a portion for controlling to not shift to step S217A) is further provided.

  According to such a configuration, in the second gaming state, the execution of the determination made by the first start condition satisfaction determination unit for the notification of the pre-reading notification by the pre-execution change notification unit is limited. When the player recognizes that the display result of the variable display of the first identification information may become the specific display result result during the second gaming state, the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the second identification information When the control is switched to the second gaming state in which the frequency of execution of the variable display is increased, the player has already recognized the possibility that the specific display result may be obtained, and the priority is given until the variable display is executed due to the establishment of the first start condition. The specific game state is continuously generated by aiming only at the establishment of the second start condition in which the variable display is executed (more specifically, the specific game state is generated by the establishment of the second start condition, and the specific display is displayed after the end. It is conceivable that more than the expected number of prize balls is intentionally targeted by a technical intervention in which a specific gaming state is generated again when the first start condition that recognizes the possibility of the result is established. On the other hand, in the second gaming state, the execution of the decision made by the first starting condition satisfaction determining means for the notification of the pre-reading notice by the pre-execution change notice notice means is limited, so By making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of one identification information will be the specific display result, a specific gaming state is continuously generated by the technical intervention of the player, and more than the expected number of prize balls It can prevent deliberate aiming.

( 6 ) Moreover, about the above-mentioned (1)-( 5 ), you may be limited to the following structures.

The fluctuation display means includes
First variation display means (first special symbol display 8a) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of first identification information (first special symbols) that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition;
Based on the establishment of the second start condition, second variation display means (second special symbol display 8b) for performing variation display of a plurality of types of second identification information (second special symbols) that can be distinguished from each other. Including
When the display result of the identification information derived to the first variation display means or the second variation display means becomes the specific display result, the specific gaming state is controlled,
The holding storage means
First hold storage means (first hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (first hold storage) for performing variable display of the first identification information when the first start condition is satisfied;
Second hold storage means (second hold storage buffer) for storing hold storage (second hold storage) for performing variable display of the second identification information when the second start condition is satisfied,
When the start condition is satisfied, the determination means is configured to display the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means when the first start condition is satisfied. A first start condition satisfaction determination means (S217A) for determining whether or not
When the second start condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the display result by the variable display of the first identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means becomes the specific display result. A second start condition satisfaction determination means (S217B),
After the end of the specific gaming state, the second gaming state is controlled to a gaming state (probability changing state, time saving state) in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the execution frequency of the variable display of the second identification information is increased. Second gaming state control means (S167, S170 in FIG. 26, S98 in FIG. 22),
At least in the second gaming state, when the on- hold storage is stored in both the first on-hold storage means and the second on-hold storage means, the second identification information is displayed more than the variation display of the first identification information. Fluctuation display control means for preferentially executing the variable display of the identification information (if the second reserved memory number is not zero in S52 of FIG. 20 in the game control microcomputer 560, S53 is preferentially executed and the special symbol pointer is executed. A value indicating “second” is set in the part, and the process after S55 is executed to execute the variation display of the second special symbol),
After 1 pending memory is stored in the first holding storage unit or the second holding memory means, variable display performed by the hold memory of the 1 is performed before the start, the one pending memory Separately, in the pre-execution change display based on the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means, the pre-execution change for informing the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) about the one hold storage. Preliminary notifying means (in the production control microcomputer 100, by executing S1802 in FIG. 35 to determine the presence / absence and production mode of the continuous notice production and executing S1848 in FIG. 42, the production shown in FIGS. The part that performs the continuous notice effect of the aspect), and
Extracting means for extracting a variable display determination random number (random 2) for determining a variable display pattern of the first or second identification information when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied ( S214A, S214B) in FIG.
A table in which determination values are assigned to the random display determination random number and a plurality of types of variable display patterns based on the determination result of the first start condition satisfaction determination means or the second start condition satisfaction determination means. A determination value table (for example, as shown in FIG. 10), which has different determination values to be allocated according to the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means when starting the variable display. A variation display pattern determining means (S301 in FIG. 16) for determining a variation display pattern of the identification information using a variation pattern type determination table for deviation (135A, 135B);
When the first starting condition is satisfied said that, by using said judgment value table and the variable display determination random number extracted by the extraction means, is carried out by holding storage that is stored in the first holding memory means First variation display pattern determining means for determining whether or not the variation display pattern of the variation display of the first identification information is a specific variation display pattern (variation pattern with super reach) among a plurality of types of variation display patterns. In the game control microcomputer 560, when S217A is executed and S229 is executed, a part for determining whether or not the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 that becomes “super reach out” in S229 is determined),
When said second start condition is satisfied said that, by using said judgment value table and the variable display determination random number extracted by the extraction means, is carried out by holding storage that is stored in the second holding memory means Second variation display pattern determination means for determining whether or not the variation display pattern of the variation display of the second identification information is a specific variation display pattern among a plurality of types of variation display patterns (in the game control microcomputer 560, When executing S217B and executing S229, a part for determining whether or not the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 that becomes “super-reaching” in step S229),
After 1 pending memory is stored in the first holding storage unit or the second holding memory means, variable display performed by the hold memory of the 1 is performed before the start, the one pending memory Separately, the pre-reading notice for the first hold storage is notified continuously over a plurality of pre-execution fluctuation displays based on the hold storage stored in the first hold storage means or the second hold storage means. (The effect control microcomputer 100 executes the continuous notice effect based on the reception of the winning determination result 2 designation command indicating that the winning determination result is “super-reaching”). The effect control microcomputer 100 executes S1802 in FIG. 35 to determine the presence / absence and effect mode of the continuous notice effect and execute S1848 in FIG. By further comprising a part) and to perform continuous announcement attraction of effect shown in FIGS. 57 60,
The judgment value table is
A common determination value is assigned to the specific variation display pattern regardless of the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved memory means and the second reserved memory means (FIG. 10A). ), (B) and FIG. 65, regardless of whether the total number of pending storage is 0 to 2 or 3 or more, the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach (super CA2-7) Determination values in the range of 230 to 251 are assigned to
Different determination values are assigned to the variable display patterns other than the specific variable display pattern according to the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved memory means and the second reserved memory means. (Variation pattern types including non-reach other than super reach and fluctuation patterns with normal reach are assigned different judgment values depending on whether the total number of pending storage is 0 to 2 or 3 or more. ).

According to such a configuration, on the basis of the determination result of the determination means when the first or second start condition is established, the variable display determination random number and the table in which determination values are assigned to a plurality of types of variable display patterns. A variation display pattern of identification information using a determination value table having different determination values to be allocated according to the number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved storage means and the second reserved storage means when starting the variable display. Is determined. Then, based on the fact that the first or second variation display pattern determination means determines that the specific variation display pattern is obtained, before the variation display of the identification information determined to become the specific variation display pattern is started. A pre-reading notice is made for the one reserved storage for which the determination has been made. Regarding the determination value table, a common determination value is assigned to a specific variable display pattern regardless of the number of reserved storages stored by the storage unit, and a variable display pattern other than the specific variable display pattern is assigned. Is configured so that different determination values are assigned according to the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means, so that when a pre-reading notice is executed based on the determination that a specific variable display pattern is obtained Inconsistency can be prevented depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved storage means. In addition, by varying the variable display time according to the number of reserved memories stored by the reserved storage means, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the situation in which the variable display operating rate decreases.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 2 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation start process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a continuous notice allocation table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the handling when the fluctuation | variation display of a 2nd special symbol interrupts when performing the continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a process table. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change. It is a flowchart which shows an effect design fluctuation stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit display process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation determination process in a jackpot display process. It is a figure which shows the content of the data table used in order to determine an effect in effect determination processing in a table format. It is a flowchart which shows the process in round in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the round post process in an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st prefetch effect process in a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd prefetch effect process in a round post-process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end effect process. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern belonging to the type of “chance notification”. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern belonging to the type of “chance notification”. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern belonging to the type of “story”. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern belonging to the type of “story”. FIG. 38 is a display screen diagram illustrating an example of an effect pattern belonging to the type of “complete notification”. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of a pseudo | simulation ream. It is explanatory drawing which shows the execution timing of a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect timing in the case of interrupting a continuous notice effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for loss. It is explanatory drawing which shows the other example of the allocation state of the judgment value in the variation pattern classification judgment table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the further another example of the allocation state of the determination value in the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an assignment state of determination values in a variation pattern type determination table for deviation when looking at a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity as a variation pattern other than a variation pattern with super reach. is there. It is explanatory drawing which shows the allocation state of the determination value in the fluctuation pattern classification judgment table for deviation | shift when it sees paying attention also to the fluctuation pattern classification containing the fluctuation pattern with a pseudo | simulation series. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of allocation in the range to which the variation pattern classification with super reach is allocated.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. A pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be another gaming machine such as a coin gaming machine, each of which can be identified when a start condition is established. And a variable display means for performing a variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, and when the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is a predetermined specific display result, a specification that is advantageous to the player Any gaming machine that is controlled to a gaming state and that is shifted to the first gaming state or the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state after the specific gaming state ends. It may be.

  First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) installed to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The effect display device 9 performs a change display (also referred to as a variable display, an update display, or a cyclic display) of the effect symbols (decorative symbols) in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols (decorative symbols) as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each. In the effect display device 9, an effect symbol display area for displaying an effect symbol on the display screen is provided. In the effect symbol display area, for example, three (plural) of “left”, “middle”, and “right” are provided. There is a symbol display area as a display area for variably displaying the effect symbols. Each of these three effect symbols is an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display. When the variation display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device along with the variation display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

  On the left side of the upper portion of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, there is a first special symbol display (first variation display means) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small display device (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the upper portion of the effect display device 9 in the game board 6, there is a second special symbol display (second variation display means) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbols as a plurality of types of identification information that can be identified. Is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) of 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b may be collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator.

  For the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variation display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14), the display condition of the variable display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The game is started based on the fact that the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that winning means that a game ball has entered a predetermined area such as a winning opening. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information). In the following description, winning in the first start winning opening 13 may be referred to as a first start winning prize, and winning in the second starting winning opening 14 may be referred to as a second start winning prize. The data related to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied is held and stored as reserved storage data that is a right to perform variable display of the special symbol until the start condition is satisfied. Specifically, the on-hold storage data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 of the game control microcomputer 560 described later.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b. The effect design (decoration design) is displayed as a variation design. The change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the change display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variation display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Synchronous means that the start point and end point of variable display are substantially the same (may be exactly the same) and the period of variable display is substantially the same (may be exactly the same). Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game balls to the first starting winning opening 13 so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. It is also possible to make the direction higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  Below the first special symbol display 8a, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory is also referred to as the start memory or the start prize memory) is displayed 4. A first special symbol storage memory display 18a made up of two indicators (for example, LEDs) is provided. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Below the second special symbol display 8b is a second special symbol hold comprising four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A storage indicator 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one every time there is an effective start winning. Then, every time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  Further, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first reserved memory display unit 18c for displaying the first reserved memory number and a second reserved memory display unit 18d for displaying the second reserved memory number. . In addition, you may make it provide the area | region (sum total pending | holding memory display part) which displays the total number (sum total pending memory count) which is the sum total of the 1st pending memory count and the 2nd pending memory count. As described above, if the summation pending storage display unit for displaying the total number is provided, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  In the big hit gaming state, repeated continuous control is performed in which the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 repeats an open state and a closed state. In the repeated continuation control, a state where the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened is called a round. Specifically, in the big hit gaming state, after the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set to the open state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is set to the closed state in response to establishment of a predetermined open state end condition (open end condition). When the opening end condition is satisfied, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until reaching the round (final round) in which the number of releases in the big hit gaming state becomes a predetermined upper limit value.

  After being controlled to 16 rounds of big hit gaming state, it is a probable change state (abbreviation of probability fluctuation state) that is a state with a high probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state (game state of the game that is not the probability change state) The type of jackpot that shifts to a high probability state (type) is called “probability jackpot”. In this embodiment, a plurality of types (two types) of probability variation big hits (probability variation big hit A and probability variation big hit B) having different production modes are provided as the “probability big hit”. Also, the type of jackpot (type) that is not controlled in the probabilistic state after the jackpot gaming state ends after being controlled to the 16-round jackpot gaming state is called “normal jackpot”. As described above, when the big hit is normally made, after the big hit gaming state is finished, the time shifts to the time-saving state as the first gaming state, and when the probability changing big hit is made, the second advantageous which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. It shifts to a probable change state (including a short time state) as a gaming state.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided at the lower right side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information called “normal symbols” (for example, “◯” and “x”).

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the display variation of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on) are turned on alternately to perform variable display. For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having four indicators (for example, LEDs) for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of indicators that are turned on by one. Then, each time the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of indicators that are lit is reduced by one. Further, in the above-described probability variation state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened, and the number of times of opening is increased. That is, the game ball is controlled to be in a high base state that is controlled so as to make it easier for the game ball to start and win (that is, the execution condition of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 is easily established). Transition. Further, in this embodiment, even in the short time state (the game state in which the special symbol variation display time is shortened), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is lengthened and the number of times of opening is increased. As a result, a gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol is increased is obtained.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased, and a state in which a start winning is easily made (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous for the player. It changes from a state to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to start a prize). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time-short state where the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened, the variation time of special symbols and production symbols is shortened, and effective start winnings are likely to occur. The possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state).

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27R and 27L that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. A top frame LED 28a, a left frame LED 28b, and a right frame LED 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer periphery upper portion, the outer periphery left portion, and the outer periphery right portion of the game area 7. Also, a prize ball LED 51 that is turned on when there is a remaining number of prize balls is provided in the vicinity of the left frame LED 28b, and a ball cut LED 52 that is turned on when the supply ball is cut is provided in the vicinity of the right frame LED 28c. . The top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, the right frame LED 28c, and the decoration LED 25 are examples of effects light emitters provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition to the above-described various LEDs for production (decoration), LEDs and lamps for production are installed.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning port 13 and is detected by the first start port switch 13a, if the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 1), the first special symbol display unit 8a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning port 14 and is detected by the second start port switch 14a, if the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends, 2), the second special symbol display unit 8b starts the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Is done. That is, the change display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter also simply referred to as “card unit”) that enables lending a ball by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit. 57. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with a program stored in the ROM 54. Therefore, the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the special symbol variation display. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and generates the random data at random timing. Based on the fact that the starting winning time is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  The game control microcomputer 560 reads the numerical data as random R from the random number circuit 503 when a start winning to the first start port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a occurs, and starts to change the special symbol and the effect symbol Sometimes it is determined whether or not to make a jackpot display result as a specific display result based on the random R, that is, whether or not to make a jackpot display result. Then, when it is determined to be a big hit, the gaming state is shifted to a big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state advantageous to the player.

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (the value of the special symbol process flag and the total pending storage number counter) and the data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  A reset signal (not shown) from the power supply board is input to the reset terminal of the game control microcomputer 560. A reset circuit for generating a reset signal supplied to the game control microcomputer 560 and the like is mounted on the power supply board. When the reset signal becomes high level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operable state, and when the reset signal becomes low level, the game control microcomputer 560 and the like are in an operation stop state. Therefore, an allowable signal that allows the operation of the game control microcomputer 560 or the like is output during a period when the reset signal is at a high level, and a game control microcomputer when the reset signal is at a low level. An operation stop signal for stopping the operation of 560 or the like is output. Note that the reset circuit may be mounted on each electric component control board (a board on which a microcomputer for controlling the electric parts is mounted).

  Further, a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage from the power supply board has dropped below a predetermined value is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the power supply board monitors the voltage value of a predetermined voltage (for example, DC30V, DC5V, etc.) used in the gaming machine, and when the voltage value decreases to a predetermined value (the power supply voltage is reduced). A power supply monitoring circuit that outputs a power-off signal indicating that). A clear signal (not shown) indicating that the clear switch for instructing to clear the contents of the RAM is operated is input to the input port of the game control microcomputer 560.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for supplying detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Also, an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also provided. It is mounted on the substrate 31. Further, an information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control is performed with the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 has an effect control microcomputer 100 including an effect control CPU 101 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives signals from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77. In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

  The effect control CPU 101 reads necessary data from a character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM is for storing character image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, a character, a figure, a symbol, etc. (including effect symbols) in advance. The effect control CPU 101 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 109. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the data input from the effect control CPU 101.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a drive signal to each LED provided on the frame side such as the top frame LED 28a, the left frame LED 28b, and the right frame LED 28c. Further, a drive signal is supplied to the decoration LED 25 provided on the game board side. When a light emitter other than the LED is provided, a drive circuit (driver) for driving the light emitter is mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speakers 27R and 27L. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the sound effect or sound output mode in a time-series manner in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the main executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S (hereinafter simply referred to as S) 1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (S3). Then, after initialization of the built-in device (initialization of the CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit)) (S4), the RAM is made accessible. Set (S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing for the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (S7). If it is confirmed that such a protection process has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes an initialization process. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  If it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs a game state restoration process (in S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (S42). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of S41 and S42, the saved contents remain as they are in the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time reduction flag, etc.), and an area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer) ), A portion where data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (S43). Then, the process proceeds to S14. In this embodiment, the CPU 56 also transmits, to the effect control board 80, a total pending storage number designation command in which the value of the total pending storage number counter stored in the backup RAM is set in the process of S43.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Alternatively, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. The initial address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (S12).

  By the processing of S11 and S12, for example, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). (S13) is transmitted to the sub-board (S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 2 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (S17) and the initial value random number update process (S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. (S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using an effect symbol (decorative symbol) that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9. Further, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the reach effect is always executed. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not to execute the reach effect by lottery using a random number. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal has been output (whether or not an on-state has been turned on) is executed (S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: S21). .

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (S22). For the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, control for outputting a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S32 and S33. Execute.

  Further, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for normal symbol determination used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S24, S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process (S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, the normal symbol process is performed (S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S31: output processing).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of special symbols in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( S32). For example, when the start speed set in the special symbol process is set, the CPU 56 sets the end flag until the end flag is set. Then, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by one. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a drive signal in S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, whereby the first special symbol and the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. 2 Executes the variable display of special symbols.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process of setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer.

Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (S34), and the process ends.
With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 2 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes of S21 to S33 (excluding S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effect symbols that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching the reach state. Such a variation display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a “non-reach” (also referred to as “normal shift”) variation display mode in a case where the variation display result is a loss symbol.

  When the shift symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the change display state of the effect symbol is displayed after the effect symbol change display is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variation display result of the effect symbol is referred to as a variation display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach disengagement”) when the variation display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variation display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are all stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas of the effect display device 9.

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variation display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is displayed, the predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variable big hit symbol, for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed. The display effect on the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely large. It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a manner, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach are used as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-4 is prepared. Also, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are shown as variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, about the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach PA1-4 which is used when not reaching and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-change is performed twice. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when the normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed three times. Further, among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-continuous, when the super PA 3-1 to the super PA 3-2 are used, re-variation is performed four times.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the special symbol variation display result is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden change is not big hit or small hit and the effect of pseudo-continuous is used, the re-change is performed twice. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed three times. Further, among the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when the super PA 3-3 to the super PA 3-4 are used, the re-variation is performed four times. In addition, regarding the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and accompanied by a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed twice.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Further, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, separate determination tables are prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (type, any of normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot A, probability variation jackpot B, and sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type judgment)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): The initial value of random 4 is determined (for determining the initial value of random 4).

  In the present embodiment, the probability variation big hit includes the type of probability variation big hit A and the type of probability variation big hit B. Probability variation jackpot B derives and displays the probability variation non-specific display result (display result with even number of symbols) that is derived and displayed in both the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state when the display result of the fluctuation display is derived. In this state, a promotion effect indicating whether or not the player is promoted to a probability variable jackpot from an unknown state whether or not it is a probable bonus jackpot is a jackpot where an effect of promotion to a probability jackpot (promotion with promotion) is performed. In other words, the promotion effect is a transition notification effect indicating whether or not the generated jackpot shifts to a probable bonus jackpot after the jackpot gaming state ends. Probability change jackpot A is a big hit that does not give promotion effects in the jackpot game state, and displays and displays a probability change display result (display result with an odd number of symbols) indicating that the probability change state is obtained when the display result of the variable display is derived. .

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B are included. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-reams, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of less than two re-variations, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a re-variation three-time variation pattern and a variation pattern type including a re-variation four-time variation pattern. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the probability variation big hit (the probability variation big hit including both the probability variation big hit A and the probability variation big hit B) is normal, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach. It is classified into CA3-1, normal CA3-2 which is a fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-ream, and super CA3-3 and super CA3-4 which are fluctuation pattern types with super reach. Yes. Further, in the case of a normal big hit, a normal CA3-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, a normal CA3-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity, It is classified into super CA 3-4 which is a variation pattern type with super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of a deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with no reach and a specific effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a change pattern with a specific effect without a reach. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of shortened variation without reach and specific effects, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and three re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 counts the counter for generating the jackpot type determination random number (1) and the random number for determination per ordinary symbol (4). Up (1 addition update) is performed. That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal (non-probability change) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state), and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set as a big hit determination value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) in the probability change big hit determination table. Each value is set as a big hit judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot determination table at the time of probability change is the same as the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the normal jackpot judgment table. A larger number of jackpot determination values (10 times the number) than the jackpot determination table is set. As a result, the probability variation state is determined to be a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state. In the following description, out of the big hit judgment values set in the normal big hit judgment table and the probable change big hit judgment table, the normal big hit judgment value set in the normal big hit judgment table is the probability variation. The hourly jackpot determination table is also used as a common jackpot determination value, and is referred to as a normal time jackpot determination value. Of the jackpot judgment values set in the probability change jackpot determination table, the jackpot judgment values unique to probability change other than the normal jackpot judgment value are the unique jackpot judgment values in addition to the normal jackpot judgment value described above at the time of probability change. It is used as a jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set as a small hit determination value in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) Each numerical value described in 8 (C) is set as a small hit determination value.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. When it coincides with any of the big hit determination values shown, it is decided that the special symbol will be a big hit (a normal big hit, a probability variation big hit A, a probability variation big hit B, or a sudden probability variation big hit which will be described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/100. On the other hand, a case where a small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/1000 when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize opening 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) uses a reserved memory (also referred to as a first reserved memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 13 (that is, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). This is the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a when determining the jackpot type. Further, FIG. 8E shows the use of hold memory (also referred to as second hold memory) based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). When the jackpot type is determined, it is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination table 131a, 131b determines that the jackpot type is “probable big hit A” based on a random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. This table is referred to in order to determine one of “probability big hit B”, “sudden probability big hit”, and “normal big hit”.

  As described above, the “probable change big hit A” is a big hit that is controlled to the 16-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state ends. For “probable big hit A”, the promotion effect is not performed in the big hit gaming state. The “probable big hit B” is a big hit that is controlled to the 16-round big hit gaming state and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state as described above. There is a case where a promotion effect indicating whether to be promoted to a probable big hit from a state in which it is unknown whether or not it is a probable big hit is performed (promotion with promotion).

  Further, as described above, the “normal big hit” is controlled to the 16-round big hit gaming state, and is not shifted to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the big hit is shifted to the short-time state). It is. With regard to “normal jackpot”, a promotion effect is shown to indicate whether or not the player is promoted to a probability variable jackpot from an unknown state whether or not the jackpot game state is a probable bonus jackpot, but an effect that does not result in promotion to a probable jackpot (no promotion) Production) may be performed.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random 1 value, and correspond to "probability variation big hit A", "probability variation big hit B", "sudden probability big hit big hit", and "normal big hit", respectively. A judgment value (a jackpot type judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  In the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b, the number of determination values of “probability big hit B” is set larger than that in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Therefore, when the second special symbol variation display is executed by starting the second start winning port 14, the first special symbol variation display is performed by starting the first start winning port 13. Compared to the case, the ratio determined as “probability big hit B” is high. In the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a, the number of determination values for “suddenly probable big hit” is set larger than that in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b. Therefore, when the first special symbol variation display is executed by starting the first start winning port 13, the second special symbol variation display is performed by starting the second start winning port 14. Compared to the case, the ratio determined as “suddenly promising big hit” is high. Suddenly probable big hit is a hit where a prize ball cannot be obtained substantially because the number of rounds is small and the opening and closing time of the opening and closing plate is set to be extremely short.

  In the probability change state and the short time state in which the winning to the second start winning port 14 is easy to win, the number of winnings in the second start winning port 14 is increased compared to the normal state that is not in the probability change state and the time reduction state. Thus, the rate of occurrence of sudden probability variation jackpots in which a winning ball cannot be obtained is reduced, and the rate of occurrence of probability variation jackpots B in which a prize ball is obtained is improved. For this reason, for example, it is possible to increase the degree of advantage for the player when the probabilistic big hits continue, and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the first special figure jackpot type determination table and the second special figure jackpot type determination table, the ratio of the big hit type “probable big hit A or probability variable big hit B” for the first special symbol and the second special The symbol is set so that the ratio at which the big hit type “probable big hit A or probable big hit B” is selected is equal.

  Note that “suddenly probable big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “suddenly probable big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b ( In other words, the “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of gaming value is given, there are two rounds of sudden probabilistic big hits and more than the gaming value. The case where 16 rounds of big hit (probable big hit A, probable big hit B, normal big hit) is determined as the second specific gaming state that gives the game value of the amount will be explained, but the variable display of the first special symbol is executed However, the game value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific game state, the second specific game state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the game value. In addition, for example, even if the same 16 rounds of big hit, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 16 times (in this case, 16 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) If the game ends in the second specific gaming state, there will be an unsettled round remaining), and an effect that encourages whether or not the jackpot will continue (a so-called rank-up bonus effect) May be executed. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all 16 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there are still undigested rounds. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (ie, an effect as if the bonus winning opening was additionally started with a bonus after finishing the jackpot of the 16th opening).

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C indicate that when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type and a random number for variation pattern type determination. It is a table referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, which are normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3 to super CA3-4, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, it is used when the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “normal big hit” and when the big hit type is “probability variable big hit A or probability variable big hit B”. The allocation of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-4 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. The big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is assigned a decision value for the super CA3-3, whereas the big hit variation pattern type decision table 132A has a decision value for the super CA3-3. Is not assigned.

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of normal big hit, probability variation big hit A, or probability variation big hit B, random numbers (random 2 for determining the variation pattern type) If the value of) is 150 to 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  Further, in the big hit variation pattern type judgment table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly promising big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 and special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit” A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when controlling the 2-round big hit state according to the fact that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly promising big hit”, the fluctuation pattern type is different from the case of controlling to the 16 round big hit state. Can be determined.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss that is used when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state, or the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is an outlier symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, the case where the common variation pattern type determination table 135B is used for the case where the gaming state is the time-saving state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. A separate variation pattern type determination table for detachment may be used for the case of the state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Furthermore, a plurality of deviation variation pattern determination tables (tables with different ratios of determination values) corresponding to the total number of pending storages may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for loss of time.

  In this embodiment, there is a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total number of pending storages is less than 3, and a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Although the case where only two types of tables are used is shown, the method of dividing the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (ie, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. .

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, if the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251 in the case of deviation, It can be seen that at least super-reach (super-reach A, super-reach B) is displayed regardless of the gaming state and the total number of pending storages.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10, the case where the common variation pattern type determination table for detachment is used regardless of the current game state is shown. Depending on whether it is a short time state or a normal state, a big hit variation pattern type determination table or a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately may be used. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), The variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected so that the variation pattern of the shortened variation may be determined. When the gaming state is a short-time state or a probable variation state, the total number of pending storages is smaller 1 or 2 (Or, for example, even when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are smaller 0 and 1), the shortening variation pattern type determination table is selected and the variation pattern of the shortening variation is determined. It may be determined.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is any one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 to super CA3-4. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is either special CA4-1 or special CA4-2. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variation display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. There is a case where classification is made into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 and a super CA 3-4 which are fluctuation pattern types including a fluctuation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream together with super reach). It is shown. In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a specific effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are fluctuation patterns not accompanied by a specific effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2 and a special PG 1-2 with a specific effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variation display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that designates a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to the variation display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start displaying the effect symbols in a variable manner.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. Command 8C01 (H) is an effect control command for designating that it is determined to be out of place. The command 8C02 (H) is an effect control command that designates that the jackpot is normally determined. Command 8C03 (H) is an effect control command for designating that confirmation big hit A has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is an effect control command for designating that confirmation big hit B has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is an effect control command for designating that sudden probability change has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is an effect control command for designating that a small hit is determined. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H).

  Note that the command determined for the confirmed jackpot A and the command determined for the confirmed jackpot B may not be used separately, but may be used as a common command for the probability varying jackpot.

  The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variation display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variable pattern command.

  The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the effect symbol change display (change) is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the effect symbol variation display (variation) and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the winning determination result. In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 19), the game control microcomputer 560 determines which variation pattern type is to be used when starting a winning. Then, in the EXT data of the determination result designation result command at the time of winning, the variation pattern type (variation pattern type including variation pattern information and information on the winning pattern) as the determination result is designated, and it is determined to be a big hit. In this case, it is specified whether or not it is determined based on the above-mentioned normal time big hit determination value (more specifically, it is specified whether the above-mentioned normal time big hit determination value or the probabilistic change big hit determination value is determined). A value is set and transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  For example, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13, and it is determined that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach is shifted). Then, a winning determination result 1 designation command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, for example, when it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 (super reach is out), the EXT data includes “ A winning determination result 2 designation command in which “01 (H)” is set is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, and it is determined that the variation pattern type is a type other than non-reach CA 2-1 and super CA 2-7, the EXT data A winning determination result 9 designation command in which “08 (H)” is set is transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the start winning prize to the first start winning opening 13 is determined to be a deviation and the variation pattern type is determined to be a type other than non-reach CA 2-1 and super CA 2-7, For each determination result, a winning determination result specifying command indicating the determination result may be transmitted.

  Further, for example, at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, it is determined that the jackpot is based on a normal jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value common to both the normal time and the probability change), and the variation pattern type is super CA3. When it is determined that it will be -4 (super reach big hit), a winning determination result 3 designation command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, for example, at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, it is determined that the jackpot is based on a normal jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value common to both the normal time and the probability change), and the variation pattern type is super CA3. When it is determined that the type is other than −4, a winning determination result 10 designation command in which “09 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first winning prize opening 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value and the variation pattern type is determined to be a type other than the super CA 3-4. For each determination result, a winning determination result specifying command indicating the determination result may be transmitted.

  Further, for example, at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13, it is determined that the jackpot is based on a jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (a jackpot judgment value unique to the time of probability change), and the variation pattern type is super CA3-4 ( If it is determined that the game will be a super reach big hit), a winning determination result 4 designation command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, for example, at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13, it is determined that the jackpot is based on the probability change big hit judgment value (the jackpot judgment value unique to the probability change), and the variation pattern type is a type other than Super CA3-4. When it is determined that the winning result is determined, a winning determination result 11 designation command in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the first winning prize opening 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the probable change big hit determination value and the variation pattern type is determined to be a type other than the super CA 3-4. For each determination result, a winning determination result specifying command indicating the determination result may be transmitted.

  Further, for example, in this embodiment, when it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the second start winning opening 14, and it is determined that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach is shifted). In this case, a winning determination result 5 designation command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, for example, when it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 (super reach is out), the EXT data includes “ A winning determination result 6 designation command in which “05 (H)” is set is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, and it is determined that the variation pattern type is a type other than non-reach CA2-1 and super CA2-7, the EXT data A winning determination result 12 designation command in which “0B (H)” is set is transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each determination is made when it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of the start winning to the second start winning and the variation pattern type is a type other than the non-reach CA 2-1 and the super CA 2-7. You may make it transmit the determination result designation | designated command at the time of winning which shows the said determination result for every result.

  Further, for example, at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that the jackpot is based on a normal jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value common to both the normal time and the probability change), and the variation pattern type is Super CA3. When it is determined that the value is -4 (super reach big hit), a winning determination result 7 designation command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, for example, at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it is determined that the jackpot is based on a normal jackpot determination value (a jackpot determination value common to both the normal time and the probability change), and the variation pattern type is Super CA3. When it is determined that the type is other than −4, a winning determination result 13 designation command in which “0C (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined that a big hit is determined based on the normal big hit determination value at the time of starting winning the second start winning opening 14, and the variation pattern type is determined to be a type other than the super CA 3-4. For each determination result, a winning determination result specifying command indicating the determination result may be transmitted.

  Further, for example, at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14, a jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (a jackpot determination value unique at the time of probability change) is determined, and the variation pattern type is super CA3-4 ( If it is determined that the super reach is a big hit, a winning determination result 8 designation command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. Further, for example, when a winning winning is made to the second starting winning opening 14, it is determined that the jackpot is based on a jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation (a jackpot judgment value unique to the time of probability variation), and the variation pattern type is a type other than the super CA 3-4. When it is determined that the winning result is determined, a winning determination result 14 designation command in which “0D (H)” is set in the EXT data is transmitted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is determined that a big hit is determined based on the probability change big hit determination value at the time of starting winning the second start winning opening 14, and the variation pattern type is determined to be a type other than the super CA 3-4. For each determination result, a winning determination result specifying command indicating the determination result may be transmitted.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 to A003 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). The jackpot start designation command includes a jackpot start 1 designation command, a jackpot start designation 2 designation command, and a small hit / sudden probability sudden change jackpot start designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot. The jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted when the start of a jackpot game of normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot B is designated. The jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted when the start of a jackpot game of the probability variation jackpot A is designated. The small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is transmitted when the start of the big hit game of the small hit or sudden sudden change big hit is designated. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for suddenly probable big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game, and specifying that the jackpot game is a normal jackpot (a jackpot end 1 designation command: an ending 1 designation command). is there. The command A302 (H) displays a jackpot end screen, that is, specifies the end of the jackpot game, and also designates an effect control command (a jackpot end 2 designation command: ending) that designates the probability variation big hit A or the probability variation big hit B 2 designation command). Command A 303 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 3 designation command) that designates the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 560 may be configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is a normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time-short state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a time-short state (not including the probability variation state). Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state designation command) for designating that the gaming state is a probability change state.

  The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the remaining number of time reduction states (how many times the time reduction state continues until the variable display is finished). “XX” in the command B1XX (H) indicates the remaining number of time-short states.

  Command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C0XX (H) indicates the first reserved storage number. Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (second reserved memory number designation command) that designates the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C1XX (H) indicates the second reserved storage number.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and the variation display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the presentation control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 by the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data take-in process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variation pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with the variation display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIGS. 15 and 16 are flowcharts showing an example of a special symbol process (S26) program executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. FIG. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, the first start port switch passing process is executed (S311 and S312). If the second start port switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning port 14 has occurred. Then, the second start port switch passage process is executed (S313, S314). Then, any one of S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of S300 to S310 are as follows.
Special symbol normal processing (S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 enters a state where the special symbol variation display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage number buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) corresponding to S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variation display time: the time from the start of the variation display until the display result is derived and displayed (stopped display)) is the variation time of the variation display of the special symbol. Decide to do. Also, a variable time timer for measuring the special symbol variable time is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S302 (2 in this example).

  Display result designation command transmission process (S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S303 (3 in this example).

  Special symbol changing process (S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to S304. Update to the corresponding value (4 in this example).

  Special symbol stop process (S304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The variable display on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is stopped, and the stopped symbol is derived and displayed. Further, control is performed to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S300 (in this example, 0). The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the effect symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S306 (6 in this example). The pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round. However, when the first round is started, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game.

  Large winning opening open process (S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. A control for transmitting an effect control command for round display during the big hit gaming state to the effect control microcomputer 100, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening, and the like are performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to S305. When all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S307 (7 in this example).

  Big hit end process (S307): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended is performed. In addition, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a probability change flag or a time reduction flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S309 (9 in this example). It should be noted that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for small hits is also a process for starting a small hit game.

  Small hit release processing (S309): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S308 (8 in this example). When all the rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to S310 (in this example, 10 (decimal number)).

  Small hit end process (S310): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control for causing the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to S300.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in S312 and S314. Among these, FIG. 17A is a flowchart showing the first start port switch passing process of S312. FIG. 17B is a flowchart showing the second start port switch passing process of S314.

  First, the first start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first hold port number). Whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4 is confirmed (S211A). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (S212A) and sets the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S213A). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 18) (S214A). In the process of S214A, random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and variation pattern determination A random number for use (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of start winning) and stored in the storage area in advance, but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 18, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a time reduction flag indicating that the gaming state is a time reduction state (including a probability change state) is set (S215A). If it is set, the process proceeds to S218A. If the time reduction flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (S216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, if the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state), the CPU 56 proceeds to S218A as it is.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect effect process for predetermining the variation display result when the variation based on the detected starting prize is subsequently executed (S217A). . Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first reserved memory number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the first reserved memory number counter, and at the time of winning based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning. Control is performed to transmit the determination result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S218A).

  If the winning effect processing at S217A is not executed due to the determination of Y at S215A or S216A, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit only the first reserved memory number designation command at S218A, and at the time of winning. Control to send the determination result designation command is not performed. When the winning effect processing in S217A is not executed, a winning determination result designation command in which a value indicating that the winning determination result cannot be specified is set as EXT data may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning is made to the first start winning opening 13 by executing the process of S215A, the gaming state is the normal state (the case is neither the probability change state nor the time reduction state). ) Only at the time of winning is performed in S217A. Further, in this embodiment, when the process of S216A is executed, and there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, the winning of S217A is performed only when it is not the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A time effect process is executed. It should be noted that the process may not be shifted to S217A only in the big hit gaming state, and may be shifted to S217A and the winning effect processing may be executed in the small hit gaming state.

  In addition, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13, when the gaming state is not a normal state (when it is a probability change state or a short time state), and when it is not a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, The winning effect production process of S217A may be executed, and a winning determination result specifying command for specifying the determination result based on the start winning as described above may be transmitted. In such a situation, when the winning determination result designation command is received, the effect control microcomputer 100 receives a winning based on the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 based on the winning determination result designation command. It is necessary not to perform an effect (an effect of a pre-reading notice) according to the time determination result designation command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the winning determination result designation command is received in such a situation, the production control microcomputer 100 starts the first start winning opening 13 based on the winning determination result designation command. You may make it perform the production | presentation (production of a prefetch notice) according to the determination result designation command at the time of winning based on winning.

  In this embodiment, the content of the reserved storage data is pre-read before the variable display performed in accordance with the reserved storage is started based on the winning determination result specifying command for specifying the determination result based on the start winning. In some cases, a pre-reading notice is given to notify the reserved stored data before the variable display is started. In the case of this embodiment, as the pre-reading notice, there are a continuous notice effect and a jackpot notification effect on hold, and when the execution condition set individually is established, the effect of the pre-read notice is executed individually. Is done.

  The continuous notice effect is performed over a plurality of fluctuation display (pre-execution fluctuation) by another hold memory data executed before (previous) before the start of the fluctuation display performed in accordance with the pre-read hold memory data. It is an effect that continuously notifies the pre-reading notice. The on-hold jackpot notification effect is an effect of notifying the pre-reading notice at a predetermined timing after the big hit for the stored data stored in the big hit gaming state.

  Next, the second start port switch passing process will be described with reference to FIG. In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold port number). Whether or not the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the memory number is 4) is confirmed (S211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (S212B), and sets the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number. Increase by 1 (S213B). Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 18) (S214B). In the process of S214B, random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and variation pattern determination A random number for use (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Note that the random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning a prize) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of variation of the second special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes winning effect processing (S217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second reserved memory number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the second reserved memory number counter, and at the time of winning based on the determination result of the effect processing at the time of winning. Control is performed to transmit the determination result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (S218B).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in S217A and S217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in S214A and S214B with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not to perform (S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 before the variable display based on the start winning is started, Pre-reading for confirming in advance which variation pattern type is to be performed is performed by executing the winning effect processing. By doing so, the variation pattern type is predicted in advance before the effect symbol variation display is executed, and as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory The effect control microcomputer 100 executes a continuous notice effect for giving a notice during a variable display that a big hit or a super reach will be continuously performed over a plurality of previous execution variable displays based on the above.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, as the pre-reading notice effect, in addition to the continuous notice effect that is noticed during the variable display, based on the determination result at the time of winning by the effect process at the time of winning in the big hit gaming state By prefetching the reserved stored data, the same effect as the above-described promotion effect is performed at a specific timing from the start of the jackpot gaming state to the end of the jackpot gaming state and the start of the first variable display. Thus, there is a case where the on-hold jackpot notification effect for notifying that the determination as the jackpot display result has been made is performed.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the normal big hit determination value (N in S220), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the probability change flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability change state is set. (S221). If the probability change flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in S214A and S214B with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (S222). As described above, the jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. 8A is unique to the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value at the normal time shown in the left column of FIG. 8B. The jackpot judgment value is added. Accordingly, in S220, the big hit determination is performed with the normal big hit determination value as the common big hit determination value in the normal time and the probability change, and in S222, the probable time big hit determination as the special big hit determination value in the probability change is performed. The big hit judgment is performed by the value. Thus, regardless of whether the gaming state is the normal state or the probability variation state, if the random R is a common jackpot determination value at the normal time and at the time of the probability variation, it matches the normal jackpot determination value at S220. It is determined. When the random R is a jackpot determination value unique to the probability change, it is determined in S221 that it matches the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in S214A and S214B and FIG. The small hit determination value shown in (C) is compared and it is confirmed whether or not they match (S223). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see S217A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 17A). Determines whether the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. Also, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing (see S217B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 17B), FIG. It is determined whether or not the small hit determination value set in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in S223), the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (S224). In this embodiment, in S224, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a certain change state or a short time state (specifically, whether or not a short time flag is set). Further, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (specifically, whether or not the value of the total pending storage number counter is 3 or more).

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a deviation variation pattern type determination table according to the determination result of S224 (S225). Specifically, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a probable change state or a short-time state, or determines that the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. A pattern type determination table (for shortening) 135B is set. When it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than 3, the deviation variation pattern type determination table (normal) 135A shown in FIG. 10A is set. It should be noted that, depending on the gaming state and the total pending storage number, which one of the variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B for detachment is used is not distinguished. The change pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B for use may be selected and set. Further, instead of using the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination is incorporated in advance, and it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is larger than the threshold, thereby determining the variation pattern type in S229 described later. You may do it. For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, determination values are assigned to a common range of 150 to 251 with respect to the variation pattern type of super CA 3-4 that is a super reach big hit. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is greater than or equal to the threshold value 150, and if it is greater than or equal to 150, it is determined that the variation pattern type is super CA3-4. Also good. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the determination value falls within a common range of 230 to 251 with respect to the variation pattern type of super CA2-7 that is out of super reach. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for random variation pattern determination (random 2) is greater than or equal to the threshold 230, and if it is greater than or equal to 230, it is determined that the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is obtained. May be. Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, a determination is made within a common range of 1 to 79 with respect to the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 that is out of non-reach. Since the value is assigned, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is less than or equal to the threshold value 79. If the value is 79 or less, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA 2-1 It may be determined that

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in S223), the CPU 56 sets the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D shown in FIG. 9D (S226). .

  In S220 or S222, when the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value (when it is determined that the big hit is determined), the normal big hit determination value by S220 (common between normal time and probability change) Jackpot judgment value) and the jackpot judgment value at the time of probability change by the judgment of S221 (the jackpot judgment value peculiar to the time of probability change) which jackpot judgment value type is used (whether S220 or S222 is the jackpot judgment) Is stored in the RAM 55 (S226A).

  Then, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in S214A and S214B (S227). In this case, when there is a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing (see S217A) in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 17A). The big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit B” or “sudden probable big hit” using the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a shown in FIG. Determine which one will be. Also, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing (see S217B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 17B), FIG. Whether the big hit type is “normal big hit”, “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit B” or “sudden probable big hit” using the big hit type judgment table (for the second special symbol) 131b shown in FIG. Determine.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets a big hit variation pattern type determination table according to the big hit type determined in S227 (S228). Specifically, if the CPU 56 determines that it is a normal big hit, it sets a big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. Further, when it is determined that the probability variation big hit A or the probability variation big hit B, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 9B is set. If it is suddenly determined that the probability change big hit, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C shown in FIG. 9C is set.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table set in S225, S226, and S228 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in S214A and S214B (S229). .

  As described above, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in the case of 16 rounds of big hit (probable big hit A, probable big hit B, or normal big hit) Regardless of whether the big hit type is a normal big hit or a probable big hit (probable big hit A, probable big hit B), the judgment value (150 to 251) in the common range for the variation pattern type of Super CA 3-4 is Assigned. Therefore, when the probability variation big hit (probability big hit A, probability variation big hit B) or the normal big hit, if the random number for random variation pattern determination (random 2) is 150 to 251, at least the variation pattern type is super CA3. -4 (that is, a super reach big hit).

  Further, for example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, when it is out of place, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach CA 2-1 regardless of the gaming state and the total number of pending storages A common range of judgment values (1 to 79) is assigned to the type. Therefore, in the case of detachment, if the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 at least changes the variation pattern type to non-reach CA2-1 (that is, non-reach is out). ) Can be determined. Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, in the case of losing, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7, regardless of the gaming state or the total number of pending storage, Common determination values (230 to 251) are assigned. Therefore, in the case of deviation, if the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 at least changes the variation pattern type to super CA2-7 (that is, super reach is deviated). Can be determined.

  Then, the CPU 56 designates the determined variation pattern type (variation pattern type including variation pattern information and hit error information) based on the determination result in S229 and the data stored in S226A, and the big hit Is determined based on the normal jackpot judgment value (specifically, whether the judgment is based on the normal jackpot judgment value or the probability variation jackpot judgment value) A process of setting data (command data) for transmitting the determination result designation command at the time of winning is specified (S230). The information for designating whether or not it is determined based on the normal big hit determination value is used when determining whether or not to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect in the production control microcomputer 100, as will be described later. .

  For example, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing (see S217A) is executed in the first start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 17A), Command data is set as follows. If “determined as outlier and determined as a specific non-reach outlier variation pattern type (non-reach CA2-1)” in S229, the winning determination made up of MODE data “95 (H)” Processing for setting “00 (H)” in the EXT data of the result designation command is performed. In S229, when “determined as outlier and determined as a specific superreach outlier variation pattern type (super CA 2-7)”, the prize is composed of MODE data “95 (H)”. Processing for setting “01 (H)” to the EXT data of the determination result designation command is performed. In S229, when “determined as a big hit based on the normal big hit decision value and determined as a variation pattern type (super CA3-4) for a specific super reach big hit”, the MODE data “95 (H) "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of "". In S229, when “determined as a big hit based on the probable change big hit determination value and determined as a variation pattern type (super CA3-4) for a specific super reach big hit”, the MODE data “95 (H) "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of "". In S229, when “determined to be out of place and it is determined that the variation pattern type is a type other than non-reach CA 2-1 and super CA 2-7”, it is composed of MODE data “95 (H)”. A process of setting “08 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command is performed. Further, in S229, “when it is determined that the jackpot is determined based on the normal jackpot determination value and the variation pattern type is a type other than the super CA 3-4”, the MODE data “95 (H)” is used. A process of setting “09 (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command is performed. In S229, “when it is determined that the jackpot is determined based on the probability change jackpot determination value and the variation pattern type is a type other than the super CA3-4”, the MODE data “95 (H)” is used. A process of setting “0A (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command is performed.

  Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing (see S217B) is executed in the second start opening switch passing process shown in FIG. 17B), Command data is set as follows. If “determined as outlier and determined as a specific non-reach outlier variation pattern type (non-reach CA2-1)” in S229, the winning determination made up of MODE data “95 (H)” Processing to set “04 (H)” to the EXT data of the result designation command is performed. In S229, when “determined as outlier and determined as a specific superreach outlier variation pattern type (super CA 2-7)”, the prize is composed of MODE data “95 (H)”. Processing to set “05 (H)” to the EXT data of the determination result designation command is performed. In S229, when “determined to be a big hit based on a normal big hit decision value and a change pattern type (super CA3-4) for a specific super reach big hit”, the MODE data “96 (H) "06 (H)" is set in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command composed of "". In S229, when “determined as a big hit based on the probable change big hit determination value and determined as a variation pattern type (super CA3-4) for a specific super reach big hit”, the MODE data “95 (H)” A process of setting “07 (H)” to the EXT data of the configured winning determination result designation command is performed. In addition, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting a value according to the determined variation pattern type in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In S229, when “determined to be out of place and it is determined that the variation pattern type is a type other than non-reach CA 2-1 and super CA 2-7”, it is composed of MODE data “95 (H)”. A process of setting “0B (H)” in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command is performed. Further, in S229, “when it is determined that the jackpot is determined based on the normal jackpot determination value and the variation pattern type is a type other than the super CA 3-4”, the MODE data “95 (H)” is used. A process of setting “0C (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command is performed. In S229, “when it is determined that the jackpot is determined based on the probability change jackpot determination value and the variation pattern type is a type other than the super CA3-4”, the MODE data “95 (H)” is used. A process of setting “0D (H)” to the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command is performed.

  20 and 21 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of reserved storage (S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, the process is terminated.

  If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second reserved memory number is 0 (S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter is zero. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 56 has a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process is being performed for the second special symbol). Data indicating “second” is set in (S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (S54).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of S52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storages = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each disturbance stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer. And stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 and saves each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. Shift the contents of. When the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer are shifted.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 saves the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Are stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 55. Each random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order.

  Then, the CPU 56 stores the count value of the total pending storage number counter in a predetermined area of the RAM 55 (S57), and then decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer after the subtraction. (S59). In this case, when a value indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first reserved storage number designation command. Further, when a value indicating “second” is set in the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second reserved storage number designation command.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of S300-S310 can be made common by the case where the 1st special symbol is made object and the case where the 2nd special symbol is made object.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 uses the jackpot determination random number extracted in S214A of the first starting port switch passing process or S214B of the second starting port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. Read out and make a big hit decision. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining the big hit or the small hit if they match. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  The jackpot determination process is configured such that when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability state), the probability of a big hit is higher than when the gaming state is a non-probability change state (normal game state and short-time state). ing. Specifically, a jackpot determination table at the time of probability change in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance (a table in which the values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) and the number of jackpot determination values are variable. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. When the gaming state is a probability variation state, the CPU 56 performs a jackpot determination process using the probability variation jackpot determination table. When it is in the gaming state or the short time state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (S61), the process proceeds to S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. There is also.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is the probability variation state is determined by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the probability variation state, and is reset when the probability variation state is terminated. Specifically, it is determined to be a probable big hit or suddenly probable big hit, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Reset at timing.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). The small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (S63), and proceeds to S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to S75 as it is.

  In S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probability change”) corresponding to the value of the random number for random determination (random 1) stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit A", "Probability change big hit B", or "Sudden probability change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (S73). In this case, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination random number extracted in S214A of the first start port switch passing process or S214B of the second start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer. And determine the type of jackpot. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (S74). For example, when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot”, “01” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is “probable big hit A”, “02” is set as data indicating the jackpot type. When the big hit type is “probability big hit B”, “03” is set as data indicating the big hit type. When the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a stop symbol of the special symbol (S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, depending on the decision result of the big hit type, one of “1”, “3”, “7”, “9”, which becomes the big hit symbol, is determined as the special symbol stop symbol To do. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “ordinary big hit” is determined, “3” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “probability big hit A” is determined, “7” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When “probability big hit B” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (S301) (S76).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (S92). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (S94). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  When the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the short time flag indicating that the short time state is set (S95). The time reduction flag is set when the gaming state is shifted to the time reduction state (including the time of shifting to the probability change state), and is reset when the time reduction state is ended. Specifically, it is usually determined to be a big hit, a probable big hit A, a confirmed big hit B, or suddenly a probable big hit, set in the process of ending the big hit game, and determined as the timing when the short time is consumed or the big hit The special symbol variation display is terminated and the stop symbol is reset at the timing to stop display. If the time reduction flag is set (Y in S95), the CPU 56 proceeds to S98.

  If the time flag is not set (N in S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (S96). If the total pending storage number is less than 3 (N in S96), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for deviation as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types (see FIG. 10 (A)) is selected (S97). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  When the time reduction flag is set (Y in S95) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in S96), the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table to be used for the selection, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (S98). Then, the process proceeds to S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of S95 to S98 is executed, the gaming state is a short-time state (including the case of a probable variation state) or the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B shown in FIG. 10 (B) is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of S102 described later. When the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process is performed as a variation pattern in the process of S105. The non-reach PA1-2 of the shortening variation is determined (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a short-time state (including a case where the probability variation state is included) or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a variation display of the shortening variation may be performed. .

  In this embodiment, even if the gaming state is a short-time state, if the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0, or 1), the game state is shortened. The fluctuation display may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total reserved memory number is substantially zero. The table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and refers to the table selected in the processing of S92, S94, S97 or S98. Thus, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (S102).

  Next, based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in S102, the CPU 56 is a hit variation pattern determination table 137A, 137B (see FIG. 11) as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. , One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of S103. One of a plurality of types is determined (S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). The value may be directly extracted from the data, and the variation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random value.

  Next, an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S106).

  Also, the special symbol change is started (S107). For example, the start flag corresponding to the special symbol referred to in the special symbol display control process of S33 is set. Further, a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (S302) (S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of S95 to S98 and S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, a non-reach variation pattern type determination table (including non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 variation pattern types shown in FIG. 10) and a reach variation pattern type determination table (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not the reach is set so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” in the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table. By determining whether or not to reach, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In consideration of a decrease in the execution ratio of the notice effect, as shown in this embodiment, the “reach out of super reach” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. It is preferable that a continuous notice effect is performed by determining whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (S110). If not set, the process proceeds to S116. When the big hit flag is set, if the type of big hit is a probable big hit A, control is performed to transmit a display result 3 designation command (S111, S112). Whether or not the probability variation jackpot A is determined can be determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer is “02” in S74 of the special symbol normal process. When the big hit type is not the probable big hit A but the probable big hit B, control is performed to transmit a display result 4 designation command (S111A, S112B). Whether or not it is a probable big hit B can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in S74 of the special symbol normal process is “03”. Further, when the big hit type is not the probability variation big hit A and the probability variation big hit B but suddenly the probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 5 designation command (S113, S114). Whether or not it is suddenly probable big hit can be determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “04”. When none of the probability variation big hit A, the probability variation big hit B and the sudden probability variation big hit is obtained (that is, when it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 2 designation command (S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in S116), that is, in the case of a loss, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (S303) (S119).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (S125). When the variable time timer times out (S126), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (S304). Update (S127). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol display control process of S32 to end the variation of the special symbol, and the first special symbol display unit 8a or the second special symbol display unit 8b Control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed (S131). If data indicating “first” is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is terminated, and “second” is indicated in the special symbol pointer. When data is set, the variation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is terminated. Further, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed (S132). If the big hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to S140 (S133).

  If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the probability change flag indicating the probability change state and the time reduction flag indicating the time reduction state if set (S134). Control is performed to transmit a big hit start designation command to the microcomputer 100 (S135). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is normally jackpot, a jackpot start 1 designation command is transmitted. When the type of jackpot is the probability variation jackpot A or the probability variation jackpot B, a jackpot start 2 designation command is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is transmitted. Whether the big hit type is the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit A, the probability variation big hit B, or the sudden probability variation big hit is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the big hit type buffer). ).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S136).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time timer (a time for which the effect display device 9 notifies that the jackpot has occurred, for example) is set in the jackpot display time timer (S137). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 16 times in the case of normal big hit or probable big hit A and B, 2 times in case of sudden big change big hit) is set in the big prize opening number counter (S138). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening pre-processing (S305) (S139).

  In S140, the CPU 56 checks whether or not a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is set. If the probability variation flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag indicating that the time reduction state is set (S141). When the time reduction flag is set (that is, when the time change state is not controlled and only the time reduction state is controlled), the value of the time reduction counter indicating the number of times that the special symbol can be changed in the time reduction state is- 1 (S142). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction number designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the value of the time reduction number counter after subtraction (S143).

  Note that the CPU 56 may not transmit the time reduction number designation command. In this case, for example, after shifting to the time reduction state, the number of time reductions may be managed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. For example, when the time control state designation command is received, the production control microcomputer 100 sets a predetermined value (for example, 100) in the time reduction number counter, and subtracts 1 from the value of the time reduction number counter every time the production symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, the remaining number of time reductions may be managed.

  Next, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (S144), the CPU 56 resets the time reduction flag (S145). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S146).

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (S147). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / suddenly probable big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S148). In addition, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (S149). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (S150). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (S308) (S151).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in S147), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S152).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to S164. When the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (S162). Here, when the big hit is normal, the big hit end 1 designation command is transmitted, when the probability variation big hit A or the probability variation big hit B is sent, the big hit end 2 designation command is transmitted. Sends a small hit / suddenly probable big hit end command. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed in the image display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (S163), and the processing is ended.

  In S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the jackpot type is a probability variation big hit A, a probability variation big hit B, or a sudden probability variation big hit (S166). Whether the probability variation big hit A, the probability variation big hit B, or the sudden probability variation big hit is specifically, the data set in the big hit type buffer in S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02” to “04”. It can be determined by checking whether or not. If neither the probability variation big hit A, the probability variation big hit B, or the sudden probability variation big hit is true (that is, if it is a normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag and shifts the gaming state to the time reduction state (S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a time reduction number counter for counting the number of time reductions (S168). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a time reduction state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S169). Then, the process proceeds to S173.

  If the probability variation big hit A, the probability variation big hit B, or the sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the probability variation flag and shifts the gaming state to the probability variation state (S170). Further, the CPU 56 sets a time reduction flag (S171). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (S172). Then, the process proceeds to S173.

  In this embodiment, the time reduction flag set in S167 and S171 is also used to determine whether or not to increase the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 or increase the number of times of opening. In this case, specifically, in the normal symbol process (see S27), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the time reduction flag is set when the normal symbol variation display result is a hit. If so, control is performed to open the variable winning ball apparatus 15 by extending the opening time or increasing the number of times of opening. The time reduction flag set in S167 and S171 is used to determine whether or not to shorten the variation time of the special symbol.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (S300) (S173).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the production control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the production control CPU 101) as the production control means mounted on the production control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S701). Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (S703), and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S704). Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (S706). Further, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the combined hold storage display unit 18c is executed (S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to S702.

  FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a command reception buffer of a ring buffer type capable of storing six 2-byte configuration effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal and stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is.

  29 to 32 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command receiving buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command receiving buffer (S612). When reading is performed, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (S617), the effect control CPU 101 displays the display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) displayed in the RAM. Store in the result designation command storage area (S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmation command reception flag (S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start 1 designation command or a jackpot start 2 designation command (S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag or a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag (S622). ).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (S623), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag (S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first symbol variation designation command (S625), the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S626). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (S627), the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S628).

  If the received production control command is a power-on designation command (initialization designation command) (S631), the production control CPU 101 displays an initial screen on the production display device 9 indicating that the initialization process has been executed. (S632). The initial screen includes an initial display of predetermined production symbols.

  If the received effect control command is a power failure recovery designation command (S633), a predetermined power failure recovery screen (screen for displaying information notifying the player that the gaming state is continuing) is displayed. (S634) and a power failure recovery flag is set (S635).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 1 designation command (S641), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag (S642). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end 2 designation command (S643), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag (S644). If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command (S645), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag (S646). If the received effect control command is a special winning opening open designation command (S645), the effect control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command reception flag (S646).

  If the received effect control command is a command for opening a special prize opening (S647A), the CPU 101 for effect control uses the second byte data (EXT data) of the command for opening a special prize opening, that is, the number of times data. It is stored in the open count storage area formed in the RAM (S647B). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening is being opened (S647C).

  If the received effect control command is a designation command after opening the big prize opening (S648A), the production control CPU 101 uses the second byte data (EXT data) of the designation command after opening the big prize opening, that is, the number of times data. The data is stored in the open count storage area formed in the RAM (S648B). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets a special winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening is being opened (S648C).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved memory number designation command (S651), the effect control CPU 101 forms the second byte data (EXT data) of the first reserved memory number designation command in the RAM. Is stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (S652). Further, the production control CPU 101 performs the first hold on the first hold storage display unit 18c according to the first hold storage number (specifically, the value of the EXT data) indicated by the received first hold memory number designation command. The display of the stored number is updated (S653).

  If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number designation command (S654), the effect control CPU 101 forms the second byte data (EXT data) of the second reserved memory number designation command in the RAM. Is stored in the second reserved storage number storage area (S655). Further, the production control CPU 101 performs the second hold in the second hold storage display unit 18d according to the second hold storage number (specifically, the value of the EXT data) indicated by the received second hold memory number designation command. The display of the stored number is updated (S656).

  If the received effect control command is a normal state designation command (S657), the effect control CPU 101, if set, is a probability change state flag indicating that the game state is a probability change state, or the game state is in a short time state. The time-short state flag indicating that there is a reset is reset (S658). If the received effect control command is a time reduction state designation command (S659), the effect control CPU 101 sets a time reduction state flag (S660). If the received effect control command is a probability change state designation command (S661), the effect control CPU 101 sets a probability change state flag (S662).

  If the received effect control command is a time reduction number designation command (S663), the effect control CPU 101 stores the second byte data (EXT data) of the time reduction number designation command in the time reduction number storage area (S664). In other words, the effect control CPU 101 stores the remaining number of times in the time reduction state indicated by the time reduction number designation command.

  Next, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result designation command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received winning determination result designation command.

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 1 designation command (S665), specifically, “00 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. The production control CPU 101 “determined that the start winning prize to the first start winning opening 13 is out of place, and that it is determined that the specific non-reach out-of-change pattern type (non-reach CA 2-1)”. The winning determination result 1 flag indicative of the above is set (S666).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 2 designation command (S667), specifically, "01 (H)" is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that “at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, it is determined to be out of place, and it is determined that the specific super reach out of variation pattern type (super CA 2-7) is obtained. The winning determination result 2 flag indicating "" is set (S668).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 3 designation command (S669), specifically, “02 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on a normal big hit determination value at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). -4) is determined ", the winning determination result 3 flag is set (S670).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 4 designation command (S671), specifically, “03 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). -4) is determined ", a winning determination result 4 flag is set (S672).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 5 designation command (S673), specifically, “04 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In such a case, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that “at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it is determined to be out of place, and it is determined as a specific non-reach out-of-change pattern type (non-reach CA 2-1) The winning determination result 5 flag indicating "is set (S674).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 6 designation command (S675), specifically, “05 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control determines that “at the time of the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it is determined to be out of place, and that it is determined that the specific super reach out of variation pattern type (super CA 2-7). The winning determination result 6 flag indicating "" is set (S676).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 7 designation command (S677), specifically, “06 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on a normal big hit determination value at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). -4) is determined ", a winning determination result 7 flag is set (S678).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 8 designation command (S679), specifically, “07 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). -4) "is determined and a winning determination result 8 flag is set (S680).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 9 designation command (S681), specifically, “08 (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines that “the start winning prize to the first start winning opening 13 is out of place, and a specific non-reach deviation variation pattern type (non-reach CA 2-1) and a specific supermarket. A winning determination result 9 flag indicating that the variation pattern type other than the reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2-7) is determined is set (S682).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 10 designation command (S683), specifically, "09 (H)" is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on a normal big hit determination value at the time of a start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). The winning determination result 10 flag indicating that it is determined that the variation pattern type other than -4) is set is set (S684).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 11 designation command (S685), specifically, “0A (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value at the time of the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). The winning determination result 11 flag indicating that it has been determined that the variation pattern type other than -4) is set is set (S686).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 12 designation command (S687), specifically, “0B (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines that “the start winning prize to the second start winning opening 14 is out, and a specific non-reach deviation variation pattern type (non-reach CA 2-1) and a specific super A winning determination result 12 flag indicating that the variation pattern type other than the reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA 2-7) is determined is set (S688).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 13 designation command (S689), specifically, “0C (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on a normal big hit determination value at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). The winning determination result 13 flag indicating that it is determined that the variation pattern type other than -4) is set is set (S690).

  For example, if the received effect control command is a winning determination result 14 designation command (S691), specifically, “0D (H)” is designated in the EXT data of the winning determination result designation command. In this case, the production control CPU 101 determines “a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value at the time of a start winning to the second start winning opening 14 and a variation pattern type (super CA3 for a specific super reach big hit). The winning determination result 14 flag indicating that it is determined that the variation pattern type other than -4) is set is set (S692).

  If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 101 sets data such as a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (S693). Then, the process proceeds to S611.

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 performs one of S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled, and the change display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is realized, but the effect symbol (decoration symbol) synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol is realized. The control related to the variable display and the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) synchronized with the change of the second special symbol are executed in one effect control process.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801).

  Effect symbol variation start processing (S801): Control is performed so that variation of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (S803): Based on the reception of the effect control command (design determination designation command) for instructing all symbols to stop, the variation of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) is stopped and the display result (stop symbol) is displayed. Control to display and display. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  Big hit display process (S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game processing (S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. Further, when the effect mode for executing the probability variation promotion effect is determined in the effect determination process described later, the probability change promotion effect is executed according to the determined effect mode. Further, in the post-round processing described later, when it is decided to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect as the pre-reading notice, the on-hold status is determined according to the effect mode determined from the same effect mode as the probability change promotion effect mode. Make a big hit notification. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. In each of a plurality of predetermined rounds, it is determined whether or not a winning determination result 2 designating command for designating a normal jackpot is received, and if received, it is determined whether or not the on-hold jackpot notification effect is performed. Then, when it is determined that the on-hold big hit notification effect is to be performed, an effect mode for performing the on-hold big hit notification effect is determined during the next round. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (S801) (S813).

  FIG. 35 and FIG. 36 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol variation start process (S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether any one of the winning determination result 1 flag to the winning determination result 8 flag is set (S1801). If none of the winning determination result flags from the winning determination result 1 flag to the winning determination result 8 flag is set, the process proceeds to S1806. If any one of the winning determination result flag from the winning determination result 1 flag to the winning determination result 8 flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 performs continuous advance notice based on the set winning determination result flag. A continuous notice determination process for determining whether or not to produce an effect and an effect mode of the continuous notice effect is executed (S1802). In the continuous notice determination process, since the decision regarding the continuous notice is made based on the information about whether or not the big hit and the variation pattern type, the winning determination result 9 flag to the winning determination result 14 in which the variation pattern type is not specified. It will not be executed even if any of the flags are set.

  Note that the continuous notice determination process of S1802 is executed when performing a variable display when the continuous notice effect is first started. That is, when the continuous notice effect is first started, the process proceeds to S1802 based on the fact that the winning determination result flag is set in S1801, and the continuous notice determination process is executed. In addition, the continuous advance notice execution flag is set based on the determination result flag at the time of winning (see S1818 and S1819 described later), the execution of the continuous notice effect is started, and the determination result flag at the time of winning is set. It is reset (see S1820 described later). Then, when the second and subsequent fluctuation display is executed after the start of the continuous notice effect, the winning determination result flag has already been reset, so that the continuous notice determination process is not executed again (S1801). N), the continuous notice effect is executed in the effect mode determined at the time of the first variation display.

  In addition, if a Super Reach or a winning prize that is a big hit occurs when a continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination result at the time of winning a non-reach event, the Super Reach is switched from the continuous notice effect that is currently being executed. Or a jackpot effect (for example, reach notice or jackpot notice) may be executed.

  FIG. 37 and FIG. 38 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of a continuous notice distribution table showing distribution of continuous notice effects. In the continuous notice determination processing in S1802, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the current gaming state. Specifically, the production control CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is the probability variation state if the probability variation state flag (see S662) is set, and if the time reduction state flag (see S660) is set. It is determined that the current gaming state is a short-time state, and if neither the probability variation state flag nor the short-time state flag is set, it is determined that the current gaming state is a normal state.

  When it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table for the normal state shown in FIG. Based on whether it is set, the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect are determined. For example, when the winning determination result 1 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach is not shifted). 37), as shown in FIG. 37 (A), to execute a continuous notice effect of the effect mode of either “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode shift” To decide. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 2 flag is set (that is, when starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is determined to be out, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2 -7)), or when the winning determination result 4 flag is set (that is, it is determined that the big hit is based on the probability change big hit determination value at the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13) In addition, as shown in FIG. 37A, in the case of a specific super reach big hit variation pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. ”,“ Countdown ”, or“ reserved ball change ”, it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 3 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit Change pattern type (when determined as Super CA3-4)), as shown in FIG. 37A, “change in change mode at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown” or “hold” It is determined that the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “ball change” is executed.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result 5 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the second start winning opening 14, and a specific non-reach shift pattern type (non-reach CA2). -1)), as shown in FIG. 37 (A), it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any production mode, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 6 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), or when the winning determination result 8 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value, In addition, in the case of a specific super reach big hit variation pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 37 (A), there is no allocation for any continuous notice effect of any effect mode. , Decide not to run continuous notice. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 7 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit , When there is no change pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 37 (A), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect mode, and the continuous notice is not executed. To decide.

  Note that the specific contents of the presentation modes of the respective continuous notice effects of “change in change mode at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown”, and “change in reserved ball” will be described later.

  When it is determined that the current gaming state is the probability variation state, the effect control CPU 101 uses the continuous notice allocation table in the probability variation state shown in FIG. Based on whether it is set, the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect are determined. For example, when the winning determination result 1 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the first start winning opening 13 and the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach is not shifted). 37), it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effects in any of the production modes, and the continuous notice is not executed, as shown in FIG. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 2 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effects in any of the production modes, and the continuous notice is not executed, as shown in FIG. 37 (B). Further, for example, when the winning determination result 3 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit Or when the winning determination result 4 flag is set (that is, when the winning change to the first starting winning opening 13 is made, the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change is set). 37), it is determined that it is a big hit based on this, and a specific super reach big hit variation pattern type (super CA 3-4)), as shown in FIG. There is no allocation for the item, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result 5 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the second start winning opening 14, and a specific non-reach shift pattern type (non-reach CA2). -1)), as shown in FIG. 37 (B), it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effects in any of the production modes, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 6 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7)), as shown in FIG. 37 (B), a continuous advance notice of any of the production modes of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball” Decide to perform the production. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 7 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit Or when the winning determination result 8 flag is set (i.e., when the winning change to the second starting winning opening 14 is made, the probability change big hit determination value is set). In the case of determining the jackpot based on this and determining the variation pattern type (super CA3-4) for a specific super reach jackpot), as shown in FIG. It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “change”, “countdown”, or “reserved ball change”.

  When it is determined that the current gaming state is the short-time state, the effect control CPU 101 determines the continuous notice allocation table for the short-time state shown in FIG. 37 (C), FIG. 38 (D) or FIG. 38 (E). Is used to determine the presence / absence of execution of the continuous notice effect and the effect mode of the continuous notice effect based on which winning determination result flag is set. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control specifies the number of times of changing to the time reduction state and executing the change based on the remaining number of times saved in the time reduction number storage area (see S664). To do. Then, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table shown in FIG. 37C when executing the first to 91st changes after shifting to the time-saving state. Further, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table shown in FIG. 38D when executing the 92nd to 100th changes after shifting to the time-saving state. Further, the effect control CPU 101 selects the continuous notice allocation table shown in FIG. 38E when executing the 101st to 108th changes after shifting to the time reduction state.

  When it is determined that the first to 91st changes after the shift to the short time state are executed, the effect control CPU 101, for example, when the winning determination result 1 flag is set (that is, the first start winning opening 13). 37, when it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning, and the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach is shifted), as shown in FIG. There is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of the production mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 2 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), when the winning determination result 4 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first starting winning port 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value, and As shown in FIG. 37 (C), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect mode, and the continuous change effect type (when determined to be a super-reach big hit variation pattern type (super CA3-4)) is continuous. Decide not to run the notice. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 3 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit , When there is no change pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 37 (C), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect mode, and the continuous notice is not executed. To decide.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result 5 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the second start winning opening 14, and a specific non-reach shift pattern type (non-reach CA2). -1)), as shown in FIG. 37 (C), it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any of the production modes and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 6 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), or when the winning determination result 8 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value, In addition, in the case of a variation pattern type (super CA3-4) determined for a specific super reach big hit, as shown in FIG. 37 (C), “change in variation pattern during symbol variation”, “countdown” or It is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of any effect mode of “reserved ball change”. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 7 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit 37) (when it is determined that the variation pattern type is “super CA3-4”), as shown in FIG. 37 (C), any one of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “countdown”, or “change in reserved ball” It is decided to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode.

  When it is determined that the 92nd to 100th changes after the shift to the short-time state are executed, the effect control CPU 101, for example, when the winning determination result 1 flag is set (that is, the first start winning opening 13). 38, when it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning, and the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach is a deviation), as shown in FIG. There is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of the production mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 2 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), or when the winning determination result 4 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first starting winning port 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value, In addition, in the case of a specific super reach big hit variation pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 38 (D), there is no allocation for any continuous notice effect of any effect mode. , Decide not to run continuous notice. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 3 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit , When there is no change pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 38 (D), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect mode, and no continuous notice is executed. To decide.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result 5 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the second start winning opening 14, and a specific non-reach shift pattern type (non-reach CA2). -1)), as shown in FIG. 38D, it is determined that there is no allocation for any of the continuous notice effects of any effect mode, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 6 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), or when the winning determination result 8 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value, In addition, for a specific super reach big hit variation pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 38 (D), a continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “reserved ball change” is executed. Decide on. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 7 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit If it is determined that the variation pattern type is (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 38 (D), it is determined to execute the continuous notice effect of the effect mode of “change in reserved ball”.

  When it is determined that the 101st to 108th changes after the shift to the short-time state are performed, the effect control CPU 101, for example, when the winning determination result 1 flag is set (that is, the first start winning opening 13). 38, when it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of start winning and the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 (non-reach is a deviation), as shown in FIG. There is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of the production mode, and it is decided not to execute the continuous notice. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 2 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), or when the winning determination result 4 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first starting winning port 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the probability change big hit determination value, In addition, for a specific super reach big hit variation pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 38 (E), a continuous notice effect of the “pending ball change” effect mode is executed. Decide on. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 3 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit , When it is determined that the variation pattern type is (super CA 3-4), as shown in FIG.

  Further, for example, when the winning determination result 5 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a shift at the time of starting winning to the second start winning opening 14, and a specific non-reach shift pattern type (non-reach CA2). -1)), as shown in FIG. 38 (E), it is determined that there is no allocation for the continuous notice effects in any of the production modes, and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 6 flag is set (that is, it is determined that there is a deviation at the time of starting winning to the second starting winning opening 14, and a specific super reach deviation variation pattern type (super CA2- 7), or when the winning determination result 8 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a super reach big hit, and the probability change big hit determination In the case of determination based on the value), as shown in FIG. 38 (E), it is determined that there is no allocation to the continuous notice effect of any effect form and the continuous notice is not executed. Further, for example, when the winning determination result 7 flag is set (that is, when the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 is determined to be a big hit based on the normal big hit determination value, and a specific super reach big hit , When there is no change pattern type (super CA3-4), as shown in FIG. 38 (E), there is no allocation for the continuous notice effect of any effect mode, and the continuous notice is not executed. To decide.

  Next, when it is determined that the continuous notice effect is executed in S1802 (Y in S1803), the effect control CPU 101 sets the current reserved memory number in the variation counter (S1804). In this case, when any one of the winning determination result 1 flag to the winning determination result 4 flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 stores the first reserved memory stored in the first reserved memory number storage area. The number (see S652) is set in the variation counter. Further, when any of the winning determination result 5 flag to the winning determination result 8 flag is set, the second reserved memory number (see S655) stored in the second reserved memory number storage area is changed. Set to the counter. The variation counter is a counter for counting the number of variation displays executed until the variation display that is the target of determination of the winning determination result specified by the winning determination result specifying command is started. .

  In S1802 and S1803, it may be determined whether or not to perform the continuous notice effect by executing a lottery process using a random number. Then, when it is determined to determine the continuous notice effect by the lottery process, the effect form to be executed may be determined from the effect forms distributed in the continuous notice distribution table. Also, in the continuous notice allocation table shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the allocation may be performed so that the selection ratio of each effect mode varies depending on the reliability that is a big hit. For example, each production mode may be allocated so that the reliability of the big hit becomes higher in the order of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, “mode transition”, “countdown”, “change in reserved ball”. . In addition, the allocation method of each production mode that increases the reliability that is a big hit is not limited to such an order, for example, “reserved ball change”, “countdown”, “mode transition”, “design variation” in reverse order Allocation may be performed so that the reliability that becomes a big hit becomes higher in the order of “change in fluctuation pattern of time”. Further, the order of arrangement is not limited to these order, for example, such that the “mode transition” and “countdown” performance modes have the highest reliability, or conversely, the reliability with the greatest success. Allocation may be performed in order, and various ways of allocating various production modes are possible.

  If a plurality of winning determination flags are set, the continuous notice determination process of S1802 may be executed for all winning determination flags. In this case, for example, after executing S1805, the process may proceed to S1801, and the processes of S1802 to S1805 may be repeatedly executed until the determination for all winning determination flags is completed.

  If the CPU 101 for effect control determines not to execute the continuous notice effect in S1802 (N in S1803), the winning determination result flag (the winning determination result 1 flag to the winning determination result) is set. One of the eight flags) is reset (S1805).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interrupting flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being interrupted is set (S1806). The continuous notice interruption flag is set in S1810 described later. If the continuous notice interrupting flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 indicates that the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start winning to the second start winning opening 14. It is confirmed whether or not the second continuous notice execution flag is set (S1807). Note that the second continuous notice execution flag is set in S1819 described later. If any of the second continuous notice execution flags is set (Y in S1807), the process proceeds to S1811.

  If no second continuous notice execution flag is set (N in S1807), the effect control CPU 101 executes the continuous notice effect based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. It is confirmed whether or not any of the first continuous notice execution flags indicating that it is in progress is set (S1808). The first continuous notice execution flag is set in S1819 described later. If any of the first continuous notice execution flags is set (Y in S1808), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S1809). If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set, then the flow shifts to S1811. If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 sets the continuous notice interruption flag (S1810).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the processes of S1807 to S1810 are executed, the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 In addition, when the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol is interrupted, the continuous notice effect is controlled to be interrupted.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101, if set, subtracts 1 from the value of the variation counter (S1811). Further, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the value of the variation counter after subtraction is 0 (S1812). If the value of the variation counter is 0, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set continuous notice execution flag (first continuous notice execution flag or second continuous notice execution flag). (S1813). By executing such processing, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect is executed until the display of the change one time before the start of the change subject to the determination at the time of winning, and the determination at the time of winning is determined. The continuous notice execution flag is reset at the start of the subject variable display (the continuous notice effect is not performed during the variable display subject to the determination at the time of winning). Note that the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of the determination at the time of winning.

  If the continuous notice interruption flag is set in S1806, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (S1814). If the second symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is finished and the variation display of the first special symbol is returned), the continuous notice interruption flag is reset. (S1815). Next, the production control CPU 101 checks whether or not the set first continuous notice execution flag is the first off-line continuous notice execution flag of the first continuous notice execution flags (S1816). . Note that the first off-running continuous advance notice execution flag indicates that the continuous advance notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 becomes “non-reach out”. And is set as one of the first continuous notice execution flags in S1819 described later. When the first deviation continuous notice execution flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first deviation continuous notice execution flag (S1817).

  On the other hand, if the flag for executing the first missed continuous notice is not set in S1816 (in this case, if the “super reach losing” or “super reach big hit” is given for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13, Based on the determination, the first reach continuous notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous notice execution flag is set), and the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to S1811.

  As described above, when the process of S1814 to S1817 is executed, the second special symbol variation display interrupts and the continuous notice effect is interrupted, and then the first special symbol variation display is restored. When the variation subject to time determination is “non-reach”, the continuous notice effect is ended without continuing the continuous notice effect. In addition, if the variation subject to determination at the time of winning is “Super reach out” or “Super reach jackpot”, after the display returns to the variation display of the first special symbol, the remaining continuous notice effect continues. Executed. With such a configuration, when the display of the second special symbol is interrupted and the display returns to the continuous notice effect, at least the super reach will be confirmed, and the player will receive a big hit after the super reach. Can increase the sense of expectation.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram showing the handling when the variation display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning for the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13. It is. Of these, FIG. 39 (A) shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “change of the variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” or “mode transition” is executed. Indicates. FIG. 39B shows the handling when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect of “countdown” or “holding ball change” is being executed.

  In this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted when the continuous notice effect is executed based on the determination result at the time of winning for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13, the continuous notice is given. The performance is interrupted (see S1810). In this case, if the change in the first special symbol for which the reason for the execution of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined is due to the determination at the time of winning as “non-reach”, the second special symbol Even if the change display is ended and the display returns to the change display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 39, the continuous notice effect is ended without restarting the interrupted continuous notice effect (Y in S1816). (See S1817). In addition, when the variation of the first special symbol is due to the determination of winning out of “super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot”, the variation display of the second special symbol is terminated and the first special symbol is terminated. 39, the remaining continuous notice effect is resumed and executed as shown in FIG. 39 (see N in S1816). However, if the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol executed by interrupting the continuous notice effect is a big hit, as shown in FIG. 39, regardless of the reason for executing the interrupted continuous notice effect, The continuous notice effect is terminated as it is without resuming the interrupted continuous notice effect (see S887 described later).

  As shown in FIG. 37 and FIG. 38, when it is determined at the time of winning that the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13 is “non-reach”, “countdown” and “change in reserved ball” There is no case where a continuous notice effect is executed. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), the change in the first special symbol for which the reason for execution of the interrupted continuous notice effect is determined is determined to be “non-reach out” at the time of winning. Since there is no case where the continuous notice effect is executed, there is no problem that the variable display of the second special symbol is executed by interruption.

  Also, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, when the variation display of the second special symbol interrupts during execution of the continuous announcement effect, the announcement effect ( Control is performed so as not to execute the effect of giving a notice to the variable display of the second special symbol (see Y of S1823 described later).

  In this embodiment, the following prohibition processing is performed in addition to the prohibition processing of the continuous notice effect shown in FIG.

  (1) If the game machine is a big hit when the power is turned on or the power is restored, the gaming state after the big hit game is indeterminate. Therefore, in such a case, control is performed so as to clear all the information on the current reserved memory number.

  (2) In the case of a high probability state (probability change state), a short time state, or a high probability state due to a sudden probability change big hit, a winning determination result designation command for determination of winning at the start winning prize in the first start winning opening 13 Is controlled so as not to be transmitted (see S215A).

  (3) When the change from the 92nd time to the 108th time is made after the transition to the short-time state, the remaining time is short until the end of the short-time state, and the gaming state and the actual state at the time of winning determination are determined according to the timing of transition from the short-time state to the normal state There is a possibility that the game state at the time of change may not match. Therefore, even in the same short time state, when changing from the 92nd time to the 108th time, using a continuous notice allocation table different from the case of changing from the 1st time to the 91st time, the “holding” Control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “ball change” is executed (see FIG. 38).

  (4) In addition, even when the power saving state is in the time-saving state, the same thing as (4) can be said because the remaining number of time-saving states is indeterminate. For this reason, by using a continuous notice allocation table similar to the case of performing the changes from the 92nd to the 108th, control is performed so that only the continuous notice effect of “holding ball change” is executed.

  (5) Further, when a start prize is received within an extremely short predetermined period (for example, 30 ms) after starting the variable display, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is not performed for the start prize.

  (6) In addition, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect based on the non-reach losing and the determination at the time of winning is not continuously executed for a predetermined period. For example, when the continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach is finished, and then the next continuous notice effect based on the determination at the time of winning the non-reach is displayed until the variation display is finished 20 times or more. Control not to execute.

  If the first continuous notice execution flag is not set in S1808 (that is, if any continuous notice execution flag is not set), the effect control CPU 101 sets any winning determination result flag. It is confirmed whether or not (S1818). If set, the production control CPU 101 sets a continuous advance notice execution flag corresponding to the set winning determination result flag (S1819). Then, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set winning determination result flag (S1820).

  In S1819, when the winning determination result 1 flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the winning is determined to be “non-reach” with respect to the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13. Based on this, the first off-line continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being executed is set. Further, when the winning determination result 2 flag is set, or when the winning determination result 4 flag is set in the normal state, “super” When the “reach is lost”, the first reach continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Further, when the winning determination result 3 flag is set, or when the winning determination result 4 flag is set in the probability variation state, “super” is given for the starting winning to the first starting winning opening 13. When the “reach jackpot” is reached, a first jackpot continuous notice execution flag indicating that a continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning is set. In addition, when the winning determination result 5 flag is set, if the start winning to the second starting winning port 14 becomes “non-reach”, the continuous notice effect is executed based on the determination at the winning. The second off-running continuous notice execution flag indicating that it is in progress is set. When the winning determination result 6 flag is set, or when the winning determination result 8 flag is set in the normal state, “super” When the “reach is lost”, a second reach continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning is set. In addition, when the winning determination result 7 flag is set, or when the winning determination result 8 flag is set in the probability variation state, “super” When the “reach jackpot” is reached, a second jackpot continuous notice execution flag indicating that the continuous notice effect is being executed based on the determination at the time of winning is set. Among these continuous notice execution flags, the first missed continuous notice execution flag, the first reach continuous notice execution flag, and the first big hit continuous notice execution flag are the first continuous notice execution flags. . Of these continuous advance notice execution flags, the second outlier continuous advance notice execution flag, the second reach continuous advance notice execution flag, and the second big hit continuous advance notice execution flag are second continuous advance notice execution flags. .

  In S1819, the continuous notice execution flag is set, and information that can specify the effect mode determined in S1802 is also set. In this case, for example, a flag indicating that the effect mode is “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, a flag indicating “mode shift”, a flag indicating “countdown”, “holding ball” A flag indicating “change” may be set. In addition, for example, when the continuous notice execution flag is composed of a plurality of bits (for example, 1 byte), a value that specifies which presentation mode is set in a predetermined bit of the continuous notice execution flag. By which, it may be possible to specify which production mode is determined.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (S1821). Next, in the case where the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) and the continuous notice effect are executed, the effect design (decorative pattern) according to the effect form of the continuous notice effect Display result (stop symbol) is determined (S1822). In this case, when the effect control CPU 101 does not execute the continuous notice effect, or when executing the effect of the effect other than the “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, the display designated by the display result designation command. The stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the result is determined. In addition, when the production control CPU 101 executes the continuous production of the production mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of design fluctuation”, the so-called chance symbol (for example, “223” or “ As shown in FIG. 445, a combination of symbols that are not reach and a symbol that is shifted by one symbol is determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 40 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol (decoration symbol) in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 40, when the received display result designation command indicates a normal jackpot (when the received display result designation command is a display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the stop design as a stop symbol. The combination of effect symbols in which the three symbols are even symbols (usually stop symbols reminiscent of the occurrence of a big hit) is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates the probability variation jackpot A (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 uses the 3 symbols as the stop symbols as odd symbols ( The combination of production symbols arranged in a stop symbol that recalls the occurrence of a probable big hit is determined. When the received display result designation command indicates a probable big hit B (when the received display result designation command is a display result 4 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control has an even number of 3 symbols as stop symbols ( A combination of effect symbols arranged in a stop symbol that normally reminds of the occurrence of a big hit is determined. In the case of a loss (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. When the received display result designation command suddenly shows a probable big hit or small hit (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), the CPU 101 for effect control Determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as stop symbols. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol (decoration symbol).

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that recalls a big hit is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol reminiscent of a probable big hit is called a probable big hit symbol, and a stop symbol reminiscent of a normal big hit is called a normal big hit symbol. And a stop symbol that reminds of a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (S1823). If the continuous notice interruption flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs a notice effect (a notice effect other than the continuous notice effect. For example, a step-up notice effect or a mini character notice during the effect display device 9 while the effect symbol is being displayed. The notice effect setting process for determining whether or not to execute the effect and setting the effect aspect of the notice effect is executed (S1824). If the continuous notice interruption flag is set (Y in S1823), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to S1825 without executing S1824.

  In this embodiment, the continuous notice interruption flag is set because the second special symbol is changed during execution of the continuous notice effect based on the winning determination result for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13. Is interrupted and the continuous notice effect is interrupted. Therefore, when the process of S1823 is executed, and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed while interrupting the continuous notice effect, the effect display device 9 is displayed during the variable display of the second special symbol. Is controlled so that the notice effect is not executed.

  Next, when executing the variation pattern and the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (S1825). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (S1826).

  FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation display time (variation time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decoration symbol). Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 41 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, pseudo-stops, and temporary stop symbols in the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, the CPU 101 for effect control is based on the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as an effect component, as the effect component). The control of the various lamps and speakers 27R and 27L as effect parts is executed (S1827). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image corresponding to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio output board 70 in order to output audio from the speakers 27R and 27L.

  In this embodiment, the production control CPU 101 controls the production pattern to be displayed in a variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Then, a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command is set in the variation time timer (S1828), and the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (S802) (S1829). ).

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation process (S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation processing, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (S1842). When the process timer times out (S1843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (S1844). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (S1845).

  Next, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether any of the continuous notice execution flags is set (S1846). If any continuous notice execution flag is set, the production control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the continuous notice interruption flag is set (S1847). If the continuous notice interrupting flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 follows the effects determined in the continuous notice determination process in S1802 according to the “change in the variation pattern at the time of symbol change”, “mode shift”, “countdown”. ”Or“ holding ball change ”is performed to execute a continuous notice effect (step 1848). On the other hand, if the continuous notice interruption flag is set in S1847 (that is, if the continuous notice effect is being interrupted), the process proceeds to S1849 without executing S1848.

  Next, if the variation time timer has timed out (S1849), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) (S1851). Even if the variable time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set (S1850), the process proceeds to S1851. Even if the fluctuation time timer has not timed out, if the design confirmation designation command is received, the control shifts to stopping the fluctuation. For example, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards is received. Even in such a case, it is possible to end the variation of the effect symbol when the regular variation time has elapsed (when the variation of the special symbol ends).

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S850). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to S856 described later. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in S857. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when a game start screen display (fanfare effect) indicating that a big hit or a small hit game is started is executed. Therefore, when the stop symbol display flag is set, since the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, the stop symbols of the effect symbols of S851 to S854 are displayed. The process proceeds to S856 without executing the process.

  If the stop symbol display flag is not set, it is checked whether the confirmed command reception flag is set (S851). If the confirmed command reception flag is set, the confirmed command reception flag is reset. (S852), control for deriving and displaying the stop symbol is performed according to the data (data indicating the stop symbol) stored in the effect symbol display result storage area (S853). Next, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit (S854). Whether it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit is confirmed, for example, by a display result designation command stored in a display result designation command storage area. In this embodiment, it can be confirmed whether or not it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit according to the determined stop symbol.

  If it is determined to be a big hit or a small hit, a stop symbol display flag is set (S855). Then, a jackpot start designation command reception flag (a jackpot start 1 designation command reception flag indicating that a jackpot start 1 designation command has been received, a jackpot start 2 designation command reception flag indicating that a jackpot start 2 designation command has been received, or a small hit It is confirmed whether or not a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a sudden sudden change big hit start designation command has been received is set (S856). If any jackpot start designation command reception flag is set, the jackpot start designation command reception flag and the stop symbol display flag are reset (S857).

  Then, a process table for performing an effect of displaying a game start screen (fanfare effect screen) corresponding to the jackpot start designation command for which the jackpot start designation command reception flag is set on the effect display device 9 is selected (S858). For example, when the big hit start 1 designation command reception flag is set, a process table for performing control to display a common game start screen for the normal big hit and the probability variation big hit B is selected. As a result, a control for displaying a common game start screen for the normal big hit and the probable big hit B is performed, so that the player cannot distinguish between the normal big hit and the probable big hit B at the start of the big hit game. Can be. When the big hit start 2 designation command reception flag is set, the process table for performing the control to display the game start screen of the probable big hit A is selected. When the small hit / abrupt probability change big hit start command reception flag is set, a process table for performing control to display a common game start screen for the small hit and the sudden probability change big hit is selected. As a result, control is performed to display a common game start screen for the small hit and the sudden probability change big hit, so the player cannot identify whether the small hit or the sudden probability change big hit state at the start of the big hit game. Can be. Next, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S859), and the rendering device is performed according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as an effect part, various lamps as an effect part, and the speaker 27 as an effect part is executed (S860). Thereby, execution of the effect which displays the jackpot start screen selected by S858 is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (S804) (S861).

  If it is determined in S854 that neither big win nor small win is made, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800). (S862).

  In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the change (change display) of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) on the condition that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received (see S851, S853). However, when the variation time timer based on the received variation pattern command times out, control may be performed so as to end the variation of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) without receiving the symbol determination designation command. In that case, the game control microcomputer 560 may not transmit the symbol confirmation designation command for designating the end of the variable display.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the jackpot display process (S804) in the effect control process. In the jackpot display process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big prize opening open flag indicating that the big prize opening open designation command has been received is set (S870). When the big prize opening open flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S871). When the process timer times out (S872), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (S873). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (S874). Thereby, the effect which displays the big hit start screen is performed. On the other hand, when the big prize opening open flag is set, the display result of the variable display that is the big hit is specified based on checking the command stored in the display result specifying command storage area. It is confirmed whether or not the display result designation command is the display result designation command 2 (S871A). That is, in S871A, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a normal big hit.

  If it is the display result designation command 2, the prefetch flag is set (S871B), and then the effect determination process is executed (S871C). Here, the prefetch flag is a flag indicating that a normal big hit, which is one of the conditions for executing the on-hold big hit notification effect as the prefetch notice, has occurred. On the other hand, when it is not the display result designation command 2, that is, when it is a big hit of other types, the effect determination process is executed without setting the prefetch flag (S871C). In the effect determination process, it is determined whether or not the promotion effect in the big hit gaming state is executed, and when it is executed, the effect pattern (effect mode) of the promotion effect is determined. The contents of the effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After the effect determination process, the set big prize opening open flag is reset (S875), and a process table for effecting according to the effect pattern determined by the effect determination process is selected (S876). . For example, when it is determined by the effect determination process that the execution pattern of “7R: None 11R: Fortune Chance (Lose) 16R: None” in the chance notification of FIG. A process table for executing is selected. Next, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S877), and the rendering device is performed according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as an effect component, various lamps as an effect component, and the speaker 27 as an effect component is executed (S878). Thereby, the production in the production pattern selected in S871C is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (S805) (S879).

  It should be noted that a process for displaying a small hit is provided separately from the process for displaying a big hit, and in the case of a small hit, for example, a predetermined period (a big prize opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds) Sufficient time (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be produced in the same manner as in the case of sudden probability variation big hit.

  In addition, in the case of a small hit or sudden probability variation big hit, the production control CPU 101 does not execute the production based on reception of the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command, but for example, for the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit. Based on the fact that the fluctuation pattern command is received, an effect that suggests a small hit or suddenly probable big hit may be executed for a predetermined period. In this case, the CPU 101 for effect control switches the process data for performing the effect suggesting that it is a small hit or suddenly probable big hit, and performs the effect according to the switched process data.

  In S874, the effect control CPU 101 executes control to display a screen for informing the start of the big hit game on the effect display device 9.

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process (S871C) in the big hit display process. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in a table format, the contents of a data table used for determining an effect in the effect determining process.

  Referring to FIG. 45, in the effect determination process, effect control CPU 101 designates the display result of the variable display that is the big hit based on confirming the command stored in the display result designation command storage area. It is confirmed whether or not the display result specifying command to be displayed is the display result specifying command 2 (S981). That is, in S981, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a normal big hit.

  If it is the display result designation command 2, a table for display result designation 2 is set as a data table for making a decision regarding the promotion effect (S982), and the process proceeds to S985. On the other hand, when it is not the display result designation command 2, a display result designation command for designating the display result of the variable display that is the big hit is displayed based on checking the command stored in the display result designation command storage area. It is confirmed whether the result designation command 4 or not (S983). That is, in S983, it is determined whether or not the big hit is a probable big hit B. If it is the display result designation command 4, a table for display result designation 4 is set as a data table for making a decision regarding the promotion effect (S984), and the process proceeds to S985. On the other hand, if it is not the display result designation command 4, it is not a jackpot type for performing the promotion effect, so the processing is terminated.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the display result designation 2 table shown in (A) and the display result designation 4 table shown in (B) will be described. In FIG. 46, (A) shows a display result designation 2 table, and (B) shows a display result designation 4 table.

  In the present embodiment, each of the display result designation 2 table and the display result designation 4 table is a promotion effect determination table for making a determination regarding the promotion effect. The display result designation 2 table is used in the case of a normal jackpot where an effect without promotion is performed. The display result designation 4 table is used for a probable big hit B where an effect with promotion is performed. Each of the display result designation 2 table and the display result designation 4 table includes an effect type determination table for determining the type of promotion effect and an effect pattern determination table for determining the effect pattern of the promotion effect. Each of the display result designation 2 table and the display result designation 4 table is stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In FIG. 46, the columns described as “SR-1” and “type” are columns indicating the type determination table, and the columns described as “SR-2” and “effect pattern” are the effect pattern determination table. It is a column which shows. The effect patterns shown corresponding to each type in the type determination table are effect patterns belonging to each promotion type. For example, as an example, the production patterns belonging to the type of “story” are “enemy A battle defeat” and “enemy B battle defeat”. “SR-1” is a promotion type determination counter for generating a random number value for determining the promotion type. In the “SR-1” column, the numerical data range (0 to 99) of the random number value is displayed. Of these, promotion type determination values for determining each promotion type are shown. “SR-2” is an effect pattern determination counter for generating a random number for determining the effect pattern, and in the “SR-2” column, a numerical data range (0 to 34) of the random value is stored. Of these, the effect pattern determination value for determining each promotion type is shown.

  Each of SR-1 and SR-2 is numerical value updating means that is updated at a predetermined cycle in the numerical data range by the production control microcomputer 100, and is extracted at an extraction timing determined for each, Used as a random value.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, in the display result designation 2 table, the promotion type determination value is assigned to each type of “story” and “chance notification”, and further, “ The promotion type determination value is also assigned and set to “No production”. Therefore, in the case of a normal big hit using the display result designation 2 table, there is a case where “no effect” is selected and decided and no promotion effect is performed.

  Among the promotion types, the type of “story” is a type to which a production pattern of story production (enemy A battle defeat, enemy B battle defeat) that performs a battle production with a story characteristic as described later belongs during the round. In the effect pattern illustrated as “story”, for example, “enemy A battle defeat” is an effect pattern in which a battle effect is performed with enemy A during the round and the game is not promoted. Also, in the non-promotion effect pattern determination table, the effect pattern determination value is assigned to each of the plurality of effect patterns belonging to each non-promotion effect type.

  The type of “chance notification” is a type to which a plurality of types of effect patterns as effect patterns of a chance notification effect for performing a fortune effect as described later belong during the round. In the jackpot gaming state, the chance notification effect pattern shown in the figure is a predetermined single round or a plurality of rounds among 7R (seventh round), 11R (eleventh round), and 16R (16th round). This is an effect pattern indicating whether or not to be promoted. In the effect pattern shown in the figure, “No” indicates that the fortune effect is not executed, and the fortune chance (losing) is data indicating that the result of the fortune draw is out of date. For example, in the production pattern “7R: None 11R: Fortune chance (losing) 16R: None”, the fortune effect is not executed at 7R, the fortune effect is executed at 11R, and the fortune effect is not executed at 16R. As a result, a production pattern that is not promoted is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (B), in the display result designation 4 table, the promotion type decision value is assigned to each type of “story”, “chance notification”, and “complete notification”. Furthermore, the promotion type determination value is also assigned and set to “no production”. In this case, “no effect” means that no effect is given during the round, and an ending promotion is made to notify that the promotion has been made at the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, at the probability variation big hit B using the display result designation 4 table, there is a case where “no effect” is selected and determined, and the promotion effect is not performed during the round.

  The type of “complete notification” is a type to which a production pattern (4, 8, 11, 16 rounds) for performing a complete notification for an advancement in a specific round among a plurality of predetermined rounds belongs. is there. A production pattern decision value is assigned to each production pattern.

  In the effect pattern illustrated as “Story”, for example, “Enemy A Battle Victory” is an effect pattern in which a battle effect is performed with enemy A during a round to win and promote. “Enemy A Battle Resurrection Victory (Ending Promotion)” is an effect pattern in which a battle effect is performed with Enemy A during the round and then defeated, then it is recovered and won, and promoted. At the end of the jackpot game state, The ending promotion which notifies that it was promoted is performed. The fortune chance (winning) is data indicating that the result of the forking is probable. In the effect pattern illustrated as “chance notification”, “chance opportunity (winning)” is data indicating that the effect is to be promoted as a result of performing fortune. “Ending promotion” is an ending promotion for notifying that the player has been promoted at the end of the jackpot gaming state after a winning chance during the round.

  Also, in the display result designation 4 table in (B), compared to the display result designation 2 table in (A), only the timing close to the end of the big hit gaming state such as 16R out of 7R, 11R, and 16R. The effect pattern decision value is set so that the selected ratio becomes higher with respect to the effect pattern (“7R: None 11R: None 16R: Fortunate” in FIGS. 46A and 46B) when the lucky effect is performed. Has been. Further, in the display result designation 4 table in (B), when the forklift effect is performed at a timing far from the end of the big hit gaming state such as 7R and 11R, compared to the display result designation 2 table in (A). The effect pattern determination value is set so that the selected ratio is lower with respect to the effect patterns (for example, “7R: fortune-drawing” in FIGS. 46A and 46B). Thereby, even if the promotion effect is not performed in relatively early rounds such as 7R and 11R, it can be expected that the promotion will be promoted, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In the effect pattern illustrated as “complete notification”, for example, an effect pattern of “4 rounds” indicates an effect pattern that is promoted by executing the complete notification in 4R.

  Next, processing after S985 of the effect determination processing will be described. The effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data from each of SR-1 and SR-2 (S985). Based on the numerical data of SR-1 and SR-2 extracted in S985, using the extracted data table (table for display result designation 2 or table for display result designation 4) set in S982 or S984. The effect pattern is determined (S986). Specifically, the type is determined based on the SR-1 numerical data using the type determination table, and the effect pattern is determined based on the SR-2 numerical data using the effect pattern determination table corresponding to the determined type. To do. Next, the data specifying the effect type and effect pattern determined in S986 are stored in the effect pattern specifying data area of the RAM of the effect control microcomputer 100 (S987). Then, this process ends.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing mid-round processing (S805) in the effect control process. In the in-round processing, the production control CPU 101 first checks whether or not the big hit end designation command reception flag (big hit end 1 designation command reception flag or big hit end 2 designation command reception flag) is set (S1901).

  When the big hit end designation command reception flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the big prize opening after-opening flag indicating that the designation command after opening the big prize opening has been received is set (S1902). ).

  When the flag after opening the big prize opening is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1906). When the process timer times out (S1907), process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (S1909). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (S1910).

  When it is confirmed in the process of S1902 that the flag after opening the big prize opening is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag after opening the big prize opening (S1911), and rounds the value of the effect control process flag. The value is updated according to the post-processing (S806) (S1912). In addition, although it changes to the state which performs post-round processing by updating the value of a production control process flag to the value according to round post-processing, when shifting to processing after round from round processing, it is S876 of FIG. In the above, since the process shifts without changing the process table selected according to the effect pattern determined by the effect determination process, when the probable promotion effect is executed, during the plurality of rounds and intervals The probability change promotion effect as the effect of a series of effect patterns to be performed can be continued for a predetermined period (for example, until the end of the probability change promotion effect). If the probable promotion promotion effect is not being performed, the process table may be changed and an effect different from that during the round may be performed during the interval.

  When it is confirmed in step S1901 that the jackpot end designation command reception flag (the jackpot end 1 designation command reception flag or the jackpot end 2 designation command reception flag) is set, the effect control CPU 101 performs the effect determination process. Based on the effect pattern stored in S987 and the effect pattern changed in S704, S706, and S707 described later, whether or not the ending promotion by the effect pattern is designated, and the ending set in S714 described later By confirming whether or not the promotion effect flag is set, it is confirmed whether or not to display the ending promotion (S1915). When displaying the ending promotion, the corresponding special ending effect is selected according to the type of ending promotion (S1916).

  The special ending effect is an effect of performing an effect such as a special ending display such as a promotion effect. For example, in S1916, when the ending promotion is designated by the effect pattern stored in S987 of the effect determination process, the effect of the ending promotion is selected. In S1916, when the ending promotion is specified by the effect pattern changed in S704, S706, and S707 described later, the changed ending promotion effect is selected. In S1916, when the ending promotion effect flag is set in S714 to be described later, a predetermined ending promotion effect is selected.

  Further, when the promotion effect flag during the ending effect is not set, a normal ending effect without ending promotion is selected (S1918).

  Next, the above-described prefetch flag is reset (S1919), and the prefetch effect flag set in S708, which will be described later, is reset (S1920). This is because these flags are unnecessary in the subsequent processing.

  Next, a process table corresponding to the ending effect selected in S1916 or S1918 is selected (S1921). Then, the process timer is started by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (S1922), and the rendering device (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) is produced according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of the effect display device 9 as an effect part, various lamps as an effect part, and the speaker 27 as an effect part is executed (S1923). Thereby, execution of the ending effect selected by S1916 or S1918 is started. Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the ending effect period in the jackpot end effect period timer for determining the ending effect period (S1924). Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot end effect process (S807) (S1925).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing post-round processing (S806) in the effect control process. In the round post-processing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the big winning opening open flag indicating that the special winning opening open designation command has been received is set (S1971). When the big prize opening open flag is not set, the CPU 101 for effect control subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (S1972). When the process timer times out (S1973), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (S1974). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (S1975).

  When the special winning opening open flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the prefetch flag is set (S1976). When the look-ahead flag is not set, it is not necessary to perform the on-hold big hit notification effect, so the big winning opening open flag is reset (S1986). Since the prefetch flag is set by S871C when the big hit type is a normal big hit, when the prefetch flag is not set, there is a case where a promotion effect is promoted to be probable big hit by becoming a probable big hit. In this case, when there is a possibility that the probability variation effect is performed, the process proceeds from S1976 to S1986 in order not to perform the on-hold jackpot notification effect redundantly due to the same effect. On the other hand, when the look-ahead flag is not set, there is no case where a promotion effect that promotes to a probable big hit is given due to a normal big hit, so even if the on-hold big hit notification effect is executed, the same effect is repeated. Therefore, the process proceeds from S1976 to the process after S1977, and the process related to the on-hold big hit notification effect is performed. Then, process data corresponding to the effect in the next round is selected (S1987). Then, the process timer is started (step S1988), and the effect device (the effect display device 9 as the effect part, the effect) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). The control of various lamps as the parts for use and the speaker 27 as the parts for production is executed (step S1989). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805) (step S1990). As described above, when the prefetch flag is not set, process data for performing the effect in the next round with the effect pattern determined in the effect determining process is set, and the process proceeds to the in-round process.

  When the prefetch flag is set in S1976, it is confirmed whether or not the next round is the sixth round based on the data of the number of rounds stored in the above-described open number storage area (S1977). When the next round is the sixth round, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the pending determination result at the time of winning (S1978). Specifically, in S1978, it is confirmed whether or not the winning determination result flag indicating the result determined to be a big hit by the determination based on the normal big hit determination value in the second special symbol is set as the winning determination result flag. .

  Then, based on the confirmation in S1978, it is confirmed whether or not there is a winning determination result determined as a big win by the determination based on the normal big hit determination value in the second special symbol (S1979). When it is determined in S1979 that there is a corresponding winning determination result, the first prefetch effect process (S1980) is executed. The first look-ahead effect processing is executed when there is a winning determination result determined as a big hit by the determination based on the normal big hit determination value. If it is a result, since it is always determined that the game state after the big hit gaming state is a normal state or a probable change state, a big hit will be made. This is because it can be secured. This also applies to the second prefetch effect process described later. The first pre-reading effect process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect as a pre-reading notice during the round, and to determine an effect pattern of the on-hold jackpot notification effect in the case of execution. . In the first look-ahead effect process, the effect pattern determined in the effect determination process is performed so that the on-hold jackpot notification effect is performed with the determined effect pattern when it is determined to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect during the round. change. The processing contents of the first prefetch effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the process after S1986 is performed. Thereby, when the production pattern determined in the production determination process or the production pattern is changed in the first look-ahead production process, process data for producing the next round with the production pattern changed is set. To proceed to round processing.

  In this way, when the next round is the sixth round, it is determined whether or not the on-hold jackpot notification effect is executed in FIG. 46, for example, the chance notification performed as the promotion effect starts from the seventh round, etc. This is because the time when the next round is the sixth round is selected as an appropriate timing for determining whether or not to perform the on-hold jackpot notification effect with the same effect pattern as the promotion effect. In addition, the timing for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect during the round is a winning determination result flag indicating that the next round is a round before the sixteenth round and is determined to be a big hit. May be the timing at which the next round is a round other than the sixth round as long as it is possible to be set. Also, the timing for performing the on-hold jackpot notification effect during the big hit gaming state round may be not only once but also multiple times during the round.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1979 that there is no corresponding winning time determination result, the processing after S1986 is performed without executing the first prefetch effect processing. As described above, when it is determined in S1979 that there is no corresponding winning determination result, process data for performing the next round with the effect pattern determined in the effect determining process is set, and the in-round process is set. Proceed to

  In S1977, when it is determined that the next round is not the sixth round, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the next round is the sixteenth round based on the data of the number of rounds stored in the above-described open number storage area. (S1981). When the next round is the 16th round, it is confirmed whether or not the pre-reading effected flag is set (S1982). Whether or not the next round is the 16th round is determined by whether or not the on-hold jackpot notification effect is performed with the same effect pattern as the promotion effect in the ending effect after the end of the round in the jackpot game state Because. Here, the pre-reading effect completion flag is used when the on-hold big hit notification effect as the pre-reading notice is already executed during any round until the ending effect is performed. This is a flag that is set in the first look-ahead effect process so as not to exist.

  When the pre-read effect flag has not been set, the pending winning determination result is confirmed (S1983), as in S1978. Then, based on the confirmation in S1983, it is confirmed whether or not there is a winning determination result determined as a big win by the determination based on the normal big hit determination value in the second special symbol (S1984). When it is determined in S1984 that there is a corresponding winning determination result, the second prefetch effect process (S1985) is executed, and the processes after S1986 are performed. The second pre-reading effect process is a process for determining whether or not to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect as a pre-reading notice in the ending effect, and to determine the effect pattern of the on-hold jackpot notification effect in the case of execution. . In the second look-ahead effect process, the effect pattern determined in the effect determination process is set so that the on-hold jackpot notification effect is performed with the determined effect pattern when it is determined to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect in the ending effect. change. The processing contents of the second prefetch effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the second pre-reading effect process (S1985), when the process after S1986 is performed, the effect pattern determined in the effect determining process or the effect changed when the effect pattern is changed in the second prefetch effect process Process data for performing the next round with the pattern is set, and the process proceeds to the in-round process.

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing first prefetch effect processing (S1980) in post-round processing. In the first look-ahead effect process, the effect control CPU 101 uses “SR” as the on-hold jackpot notification effect execution determination counter for generating a random value used to determine whether or not to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect. -3 "is extracted (S700). Here, the on-hold big hit notification effect execution determination counter is a numerical value updating means which is updated at a predetermined cycle within a predetermined numerical data range by the effect control microcomputer 100, and is extracted at the execution timing of S1980. Is used as a random value.

  For “SR-3”, the execution execution determination value for determining to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect in the numerical data range of the random value is the first prefetch effect process and the second prefetch effect process. Is determined in advance for execution determination. The data of such effect execution determination values is set in an effect execution determination table stored in the ROM of the effect control microcomputer 100. In the effect execution determination table, data is set so that the number of effect execution determination values when execution is determined in the first prefetch effect process is different from the number of effect execution determination values when execution is determined in the second prefetch effect process. Has been. For example, when it is determined to execute in the first pre-reading effect process, it is determined to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect at a rate of 70%. An effect execution decision value is set in the effect execution determination table so that the effect execution is determined.

  It should be noted that, for example, the ratio is set so that the decision to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect is performed at a higher rate when the execution determination is made in the second prefetch effect process than in the first prefetch effect process. It may be determined that the on-hold big hit notification effect is executed at a different rate between the prefetch effect process and the second prefetch effect process.

  Next, based on “SR-3” extracted in S701, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect using the effect execution determination table (S701). As for the first look-ahead effect process, a decision is made to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect at a rate of 70%. Then, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect (S702). When it is determined not to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect, the process ends. On the other hand, when the decision to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect is made, in S703 to S706, the effect pattern determined in the above-described effect determination process is changed in order to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect during the round. Processing is performed.

  Based on the data specifying the effect pattern stored in the aforementioned effect pattern specifying data area, it is confirmed whether or not the effect type selected and determined in the effect determining process is “story” (S703). When the production type is “story”, the production pattern of “story” is changed to the same production pattern of victory as when the promotion pattern is promoted by the probable change promotion production (S704), and the process proceeds to S708. In S704, specifically, when the effect pattern determined by the effect determination process is “Enemy A Battle Defeat”, “Enemy A” is the same effect pattern as the effect pattern selected in the display result designation 4 table. Change to “Battle Victory” production pattern. When the effect pattern determined by the effect determination process is “Enemy B Battle Defeat”, the effect of “Enemy B Battle Victory” which is the same effect pattern as the effect pattern selected in the display result designation 4 table. Change to a pattern. Thus, in the jackpot gaming state, when there is a winning determination result determined by the second special symbol based on the determination based on the normal jackpot determination value, the on-hold jackpot notification effect in the same effect mode as the probability variation promotion effect Will be performed.

  When the effect type is not “story” in S703, the effect type selected and determined in the effect determining process based on the data specifying the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern specifying data area is “chance notification”. It is confirmed whether or not (S705). When the production type is “chance announcement”, the production pattern of “chance announcement” is set to the same production pattern as when the promotion is promoted by the probabilistic promotion production of “7R: lucky chance (winning) 11R: none 16R: none”. Change (S706), and proceed to S708. Thus, in the jackpot gaming state, when there is a winning determination result determined by the second special symbol based on the determination based on the normal jackpot determination value, the on-hold jackpot notification effect in the same effect mode as the probability variation promotion effect Will be performed.

  If the effect type is not “chance notification” in S705, the data specifying the effect pattern stored in the effect pattern specifying data area is data of the type “no effect”. As shown in S871B of FIG. 44, the prefetch flag is set and the first prefetch effect process is performed when the “display result designation 2 command” is received, that is, when the normal big hit, the normal big hit. The production type at this time is “story”, “chance announcement”, or “no production”, so if “story” or “chance announcement” is not selected, This is because “None” is selected. Therefore, when the production type is not “chance notification” in S705, the production type is “no production”, so the production pattern of “no production” is a probable promotion effect called “8 round (R) complete announcement”. It changes to the same production pattern as when promoting (S707), and proceeds to S708. Thus, in the jackpot gaming state, when there is a winning determination result determined by the second special symbol based on the determination based on the normal jackpot determination value, the on-hold jackpot notification effect in the same effect mode as the probability variation promotion effect Will be performed.

  In S708, in response to the decision to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect during the round, the pre-read effect flag is set in order to prevent the on-hold jackpot notification effect from being repeatedly executed in the ending effect. (S708), and the process ends.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the second prefetch effect process (S1985) in the post-round process. In the second look-ahead effect process, the effect control CPU 101 extracts numerical data from “SR-3” as the on-hold big hit notification effect execution determination counter (S711).

  Next, based on “SR-3” extracted in S701, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect using the effect execution determination table (S712). As for the second pre-reading effect process, it is determined to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect at a rate of 70%. Then, it is confirmed whether or not it is determined to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect (S713). When it is determined not to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect, the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect, the ending promotion effect flag is set in order to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect in the ending effect after the end of the round (S714). Thus, according to the effect pattern selected in S1916 of FIG. 47, the on-hold internal jackpot notification effect is performed in the ending effect after the end of the round, based on the data in the process table selected in S1921.

  FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S807) in the effect control process. In the jackpot end effect process, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end effect period timer (step S970). Then, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the jackpot end effect period timer has become 0 (S971).

  If the value of the big hit end effect period timer is not 0, 1 is subtracted from the value of the process timer (step S972). When the process timer times out (step S973), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is started again by setting the process timer setting value set next in the process table in the process timer (step S974). Further, the control state for the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S975). Thus, the ending effect selected in S1916 or S1918 is executed in the round process. By executing the ending effect in this way, the ending promotion effect as described above or the on-hold big hit notification effect with the same effect pattern as the effect pattern of the ending promotion effect is executed.

  When the value of the big hit end effect period timer becomes 0 in S971, the effect control CPU 101, if set, sets the continuous notice execution flag (in this embodiment, the first discontinuation notice execution flag, The first reach continuous notice execution flag or the first big hit continuous notice execution flag) and the continuous notice interruption flag are reset (S976). When the process of S976 is executed and the change display of the second special symbol is executed in the middle of the continuous notice effect, and the change display result of the second special symbol is a big hit. Is controlled to end the continuous notice effect as it is without continuing the interrupted remaining continuous notice effect.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (S800) (S892).

  As described above, the promotion effect described above and the on-hold jackpot notification effect are performed in the same effect, but the following can be said by comparing these effects. From the start of the jackpot gaming state, such as the seventh round of the jackpot gaming state or the ending of the jackpot gaming state, on the condition that the decision to make the jackpot display result for the pending storage during the jackpot gaming state On-hold jackpot notification effect that informs that the jackpot is determined to be a big hit by performing the same effect as the promotion effect at a specific timing between the end of the jackpot game state and the start of the first variable display Is done. As a result, when the big hit gaming state is reached, these two types of notifications are performed in the same production, so it is easy to recognize whether the player is in an advantageous state just by paying attention to the same production. can do. Therefore, even when the two types of notification are performed when the big hit gaming state is entered, the player may feel joy that the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the performance. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the player when the big hit gaming state is achieved.

  Moreover, although the promotion effect mentioned above and the jackpot notification effect within a holding | maintenance are performed by the same effect, the following can be said regarding the timing when these effects are performed. As for the promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), the ratio of the effect pattern in which the promotion effect is not performed during the ending is higher than the ratio of the effect pattern performed in the ending is 90% ( The story, chance announcement, and complete announcement (90% in total)), and the promotion performance is executed more frequently during the round than at the ending. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the on-hold big hit notification effect may be executed during the round when it is determined to be executed by the fifth round. As shown, when it is determined to be executed from the sixth round to the fifteenth round, a notification effect is performed only at the ending time. Therefore, the promotion effect has a higher ratio of being executed during the round than the on-hold jackpot notification effect, and a lower ratio of execution at the ending. Thereby, the player can easily predict which of the notification means has been performed at the timing at which the same effect is performed.

  Next, a display example of the promotion effect displayed on the effect display device 9 and the on-holding jackpot notification effect performed in the same effect pattern as the promotion effect will be described. 52 and 53 are display screen diagrams showing examples of effect patterns belonging to the type of “chance notification”. 52 and 53 show a case where a lucky draw is performed only in 7R in the big hit gaming state, and a case where it is a win and a case where it is lost.

  Referring to FIG. 52, after the big hit display result not showing that the probability variation big hit is shown as shown in (A), the big hit gaming state of 1R to 7R as shown in (B) and (C) is displayed. Production is performed. Then, in 7R, as shown in (D), a message such as “Looking opportunity, a big chance if a gold ball comes out” is displayed, and as shown in (E), an image for performing forking is displayed. The

  Referring to FIG. 53, when it is determined to perform an effect pattern for notifying that there is a promotion in the round or notifying that there is an on-hold jackpot, then, for example, (F) to The image display shown in (I) is performed. In addition, when it is determined to execute an effect pattern for notification without promotion, the effect is performed with the effect pattern that displays images shown in (J) to (M). In addition, when it is determined to perform an effect pattern for performing ending promotion in which notification of promotion is not performed during the round and notification of promotion is performed in the ending effect, image display shown in (J) to (O) The production is performed in the production pattern. Also, when it is decided to notify that there is an on-hold big hit in the ending effect, the effect is performed with the same effect pattern as the effect patterns for displaying images shown in (J) to (O).

  When it is decided to execute the promotion pattern with promotion, or when it is decided that a notification that there is a big hit in the hold is made, as a result of forklift, as shown in FIG. When the gold ball indicating the character "" is displayed, the notification of promotion or the notification that there is a big hit in the hold is performed in the same effect pattern. Then, after the effect of 8R-16R big hit gaming state is performed as shown in (G), (H), as shown in (I), as shown in (I), "Big hit end, big chance" A message is displayed. As a result, the notification with the promotion or the notification that there is a big hit in the hold is performed with the same production pattern.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the ending promotion performance pattern, or when it is determined to execute the promotion pattern without promotion, as a result of forklift, as shown in (J), “sorry” By performing the loss display in which a white ball indicating the characters “L” is displayed, notification that there is no promotion or notification that there is no on-hold big hit is performed in the same effect pattern. Then, after the effect of the big hit gaming state of 8R to 16R is performed as shown in (K), (L), as shown in (M), a message such as “End of big hit, short time” is shown as the ending effect. Is displayed. As a result, notification without promotion or notification that there is no big hit in the hold is performed with the same effect pattern. When it is determined to execute the effect pattern for notification without promotion, the ending effect as the normal ending effect is ended by such display. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the ending promotion effect pattern, or when it is decided to notify that there is a big hit on hold by the ending effect, as shown in (N), An effect of promoting the ending in which the determined character 95 appears is performed. Then, as shown in (O), a message such as “Big hit end, big chance” is displayed. As a result, the notification with the promotion or the notification that there is a big hit in the hold is performed with the same production pattern. Then, the ending effect as the special ending effect ends.

  If an operation button that can be operated by the player is provided, as shown in (E), the operation button operation “Please press the button” is displayed when an image indicating that a fortune is to be displayed is displayed. A message for requesting an image and an image indicating an operation button may be displayed, and when the operation button is operated within a predetermined time, the result of forklift may be displayed. If such control is performed, the promotion effect includes a promotion effect that is executed on the condition that the operation on the operation button 130 has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game, Can be improved.

  54 and 55 are display screen diagrams showing examples of effect patterns belonging to the type of “story”. 54 and 55, a battle effect is performed with the enemy A as an enemy, and a case of winning and a case of losing are shown.

  The outline of the production in the production pattern belonging to the “story” type is as follows. Referring to FIGS. 54 and 55, in the effect pattern belonging to the “story” type, after the jackpot display result is displayed, the teammate character 94 who becomes the friend of the player is one of the enemy characters A to C. A battle production is performed by cooking confrontation with any of the above, and as a result of the battle production, the teammate character 94 wins or loses. The production pattern in which the teammate character 94 wins is a production pattern in which a notification of promotion is given or a notification that there is a big hit on hold. The effect pattern in which the teammate character 94 is defeated is an effect pattern in which notification that there is no promotion or notification that there is no on-hold big hit is made.

  Next, the production patterns belonging to the “story” type will be described in detail. Referring to FIG. 54, after the jackpot display result is displayed as shown in (A), a message indicating a command “Get food” is displayed as shown in (B). Then, as shown in (C) and (D), in 1R to 3R, after the image of the teammate character 94 appearing and acquiring food is displayed, in 4R, as shown in (E), the enemy characters A to C appears and the title message “Cooking Confrontation” is displayed, indicating that the food confrontation will be performed using the acquired ingredients.

  When it is determined to execute an effect pattern for performing a battle effect with the enemy A, the teammate character 94 and the enemy character A appear as shown in (F) in 5R, and this is called “pig confrontation”. A title message is displayed, indicating that a contest with pork dishes will take place. Then, in 6R, as shown in (G), an image display for starting a confrontation with pork dishes is performed. Thereafter, in 7R, an image display for completing the cooking of the friend character 94 is performed as shown in (H), and in 8R, an image display for completing the cooking of the enemy character A is performed as shown in (I). 9R, an image display indicating that the finished dish is to be sampled is performed as shown in (J).

  Referring to FIG. 55, when it is determined to execute an effect pattern that wins in the battle effect in order to notify that there is a promotion or a notification that there is a jackpot on hold, for example, Production is performed in the same production pattern that displays the images shown in (K) to (M). In addition, when it is determined to execute an effect pattern for notification without promotion, the effect is performed with the effect pattern that displays images shown in (N) to (O). In addition, when it is determined to execute an effect pattern in which a resurgence victory (with promotion) is made in the battle effect in order to notify that there is a promotion, the effect is displayed in the effect pattern that displays the images shown in (N) to (R). Is done. In addition, when it is determined in the ending effect that there is an on-hold big hit, the effect is performed with the same effect pattern as the effect patterns for displaying images shown in (N) to (R).

  When it is determined to execute the effect pattern of “Victory” as described above, in 16R, as shown in (K), the teammate character 94 points more than the enemy character A as the tasting result. Is displayed, and as shown in (L), the image display in which the teammate character 94 wins the cooking contest as a battle effect is performed. Thereafter, as shown in (M), a message such as “End of jackpot, great chance” is displayed as an ending effect. As a result, the notification with the promotion or the notification that there is a big hit in the hold is performed with the same production pattern.

  On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the effect pattern of “Resurrection victory” as described above, or when it is determined to execute the effect pattern of “Defeat”, in 16R, (N) As shown in the figure, as the tasting result, the enemy character A has an image display in which the number of points is higher than that of the A teammate character 94. The displayed image is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in (P), a message such as “End of jackpot, short time” is displayed as an ending effect. As a result, notification without promotion or notification that there is no big hit in the hold is performed with the same effect pattern. When it is determined to execute the “defeat” effect pattern without promotion, the ending effect as the normal ending effect is ended by such display. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the “Revival Victory” effect pattern, or when it is determined that there is an on-hold jackpot due to the ending effect, as shown in (Q) The defeated teammate character 94 is revived and the ending promotion is performed again. Then, as shown in (R), a message such as “Big hit end, big chance” is displayed. As a result, the notification with the promotion or the notification that there is a big hit in the hold is performed with the same production pattern. Then, the ending effect as the special ending effect ends.

  In addition, as an effect mode of such a battle effect, a different effect mode is set depending on the enemy character to be confronted. For example, the production mode is set so that the ingredients for cooking confrontation differ for each enemy character. Moreover, as an effect mode of such a battle effect, a confrontation method may be set to be different for each enemy character to be confronted. For example, the enemy character A may be set to have a different confrontation method, such as a cooking battle, an enemy character B a car race battle, and an enemy character C a sports battle.

  FIG. 56 is a display screen diagram showing an example of an effect pattern belonging to the type of “complete notification”. FIG. 56 shows a case in which a notification of promotion is given or a notification that there is a big hit in the hold is given by performing a full notification effect in 8R in the big hit gaming state.

  Referring to FIG. 56, after the jackpot display result is displayed as shown in (A), effects of 1R to 8R jackpot gaming state are performed as shown in (B) to (D). Then, in 8R, as shown in (E), a message “Valene” is displayed, and after a display that breaks the image is performed, “Did you do it” as shown in (F)? A message is displayed. As a result, the notification with the promotion or the notification that there is a big hit in the hold is performed with the same production pattern. Thereafter, as shown in (G) and (H), effects of 9R to 16R big hit gaming state are performed. Then, as shown in (I), a message such as “End of jackpot, great chance” is displayed as an ending effect. As a result, the notification with the promotion or the notification that there is a big hit in the hold is performed with the same production pattern.

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect will be described. 57 to 60 are explanatory diagrams illustrating specific examples of the effect of the continuous notice effect. Among these, FIG. 57 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”. FIG. 58 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode change”. FIG. 59 shows a specific example of the effect of the “countdown” continuous notice effect. FIG. 60 shows a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change”. 57 to 60, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3). In the example shown in FIGS. 57 to 60, the winning determination is made for the start winning to the first start winning opening 13, and the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. In this case, a continuous notice effect is shown, but the determination at the time of winning is made with respect to the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, and the change of the effect symbol is synchronized with the change display of the second special symbol. Even when the continuous notice effect is performed while the display is being executed, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner.

  First, with reference to FIG. 57, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 57, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (2), when the change display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the change display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 57 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly received start prize (see S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see S218A). Also, the updated first reserved memory number designation command is transmitted (see S218A), and the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the received first reserved memory number designation command as shown in FIG. 57 (2). Then, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 (see S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice determination process (see S1802) based on the determination result flag at the time of winning. ”And the chance symbol symbol as the stop symbol of the production symbol (see S1822). Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (5), the variation time ends, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. (See S1822). Also, as shown in FIG. 57 (6), a predetermined effect such as a display in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of the change of the effect symbol is performed (see S1848). Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of the change of the effect symbol is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 57, and for example, a movable member (for example, a character or the like) provided above, below or on the side of the effect display device 9 is imitated. The movable object having the shape described above may be moved at the start of fluctuation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of fluctuation. Further, for example, the method of starting the change of the design at the start of the change of the effect design may be made different from normal. For example, in the case where the middle left and right stage design usually starts to change at the same time, the left middle right stage design changes at different timings, or once starts to change upward (or downward). It is also possible to start the fluctuation downward (or upward) as shown in FIG. Conversely, in FIG. 57 (5), the way of stopping the fluctuation of the symbols may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be stopped in the order of left, right, and middle. The symbols may be stopped in the order of left, middle, and right.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57 (7), the effect symbol change display is executed (see S1845). As shown in FIG. 57 (8), when the change time ends and the symbol confirmation designation command is received, the chance is reached. The target symbol is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines the chance eye symbol as the stop symbol of the effect symbol based on the fact that “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” is determined as the effect mode of the continuous notice effect. (See S1822). Further, as shown in FIG. 57 (9), a predetermined effect such as a display in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of the change of the effect symbol is performed (see S1848).

  Thereafter, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is started. Further, the notice effect in the similar effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 58, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode shift” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 58, first, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 58 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly received start prize (see S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see S218A). Further, the updated first reserved memory number designation command is transmitted (see S218A), and the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the received first reserved memory number designation command as shown in FIG. 58 (2). Then, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 (see S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (3), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines “mode shift” as the production mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice determination process (see S1802) based on the determination result flag at the time of winning being set. To do. Then, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, as shown in FIG. 58 (4), the background currently displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display. Another background screen is interrupted from the side of the screen and the two background screens are brought together (for example, the ocean background screen and the mountain background screen are produced together) (See S1848). Then, when the variation time ends and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, as shown in FIG. 58 (5), an effect of a mode that is finally pushed back to the original background screen is executed (see S1848). The stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 58 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol display as shown in FIG. 58 (6). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen A production of such a mode) is executed (see S1848). Then, when the variation time ends and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, as shown in FIG. 58 (7), an effect is finally performed such that it is pushed back to the original background screen (see S 1848). The stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 58 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “mode shift” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 58 (8). In the display screen, another background screen is interrupted from the side of the currently displayed background screen and the two background screens overlap each other (for example, the sea background screen and the mountain background screen A production of such a mode) is executed (see S1848). Then, when the variation time ends and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, as shown in FIG. 58 (9), an effect is finally performed in such a manner that it is pushed back to the original background screen (see S1848). The stop symbol (the off symbol in FIG. 58 (9)) is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  In the above manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started. Further, the notice effect in the similar effect mode may be executed when the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is executed. In this case, when the display result of the variable display based on the start winning that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is “big hit”, for example, after performing an effect in such a manner that the two background screens are confronted, In other words, the background screen that has been interrupted from the side wins and the background screen is switched, and the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed as the final stop symbol. In addition, the mode of the continuous notice effect of “mode transition” is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, instead of being pushed back to the original background screen at the end of the change for each change display, You may make it perform the effect of the aspect from which a background screen changes for every display.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a specific example of the production mode of the continuous notice effect of “countdown” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 59, first, as shown in FIG. 59 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 59 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly received start prize (see S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see S218A). Further, the updated first reserved memory number designation command is transmitted (see S218A), and the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the received first reserved memory number designation command as shown in FIG. 59 (2). Then, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 (see S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (3), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 determines “countdown” as the production mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice determination process (see S1802) based on the fact that the winning determination result flag is set. . Then, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode, as shown in FIG. 59 (4), “Count 3!” Or the like is displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the change display of the effect symbol. An effect is performed as if the character string is displayed and the countdown is started (see S1848). Then, when the fluctuation time is over and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 59 (5)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (5) (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 59 (6). A character string such as “Count 2!” Is displayed on the screen, and an effect is produced in which the countdown continues (see S1848). Then, when the change time is over and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 59 (7)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (7) (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, based on the fact that “countdown” is determined as the effect mode, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 59 (8). A character string such as “Count 1!” Is displayed on the screen, and an effect is produced in which the countdown continues (see S1848). Then, when the change time is over and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 59 (9)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (9) (see S853).

  In the above manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a specific example of the effect mode of the continuous notice effect of “reserved ball change” will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 60, first, as shown in FIG. 60 (2), when the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 60 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 executes a winning effect process based on the newly received start prize (see S217A). Then, a winning determination result designation command corresponding to the winning determination result is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (see S218A). Also, the updated first reserved memory number designation command is transmitted (see S218A), and the production control microcomputer 100 is based on the received first reserved memory number designation command as shown in FIG. 60 (2). Then, the display of the first reserved memory number in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is increased by 1 (see S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (3), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 determines “change in reserved ball” as the production mode of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice determination process (see S1802) based on the determination result flag at the time of winning being set. And Then, based on the determination that the “reserved ball change” is determined as the effect mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (4), during the variation display of the effect symbol, the first hold memory display unit 18c is subject to the determination at the time of winning. The display of the first reserved storage number thus changed is changed to a display of an aspect different from normal (star display in the example shown in FIG. 60 (4)) (see S1848). In the example shown in FIG. 60, after the winning determination is made, the continuous notice effect of the “reserved ball change” effect mode is started from the time of the next start of variation display. When the determination result designation command is received, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning may be changed to a display different from the normal display to start the continuous notice effect. Then, when the variation time ends and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, as shown in FIG. 60 (5), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 60 (5)) is stopped and displayed (see S853). As shown in FIG. 60 (5), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c continues to be displayed in a mode different from the normal (FIG. 60). 60 (5), star display).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. 1 The display of the number of reserved memories is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variation display is started. Further, the production control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that “holding ball change” is determined as the production mode, as shown in FIG. In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning is continued in a display different from the normal display (in the example shown in FIG. 60 (6), star display) (see S1848). Then, when the variation time ends and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, as shown in FIG. 60 (7), the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 60 (7)) is stopped and displayed (see S853). In addition, as shown in FIG. 60 (7), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a different form (FIG. 60). 60 (7), star display).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. The display of the number of 1 reserved memory is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variable display is started. Further, the production control microcomputer 100, based on the fact that “pending ball change” is determined as the production mode, as shown in FIG. 60 (8), during the variation display of the production symbol, the first reservation storage. In the display unit 18c, the display of the first reserved memory number that is the object of the determination at the time of winning is continued in a different manner from the normal display (star display in the example shown in FIG. 60 (8)) (see S1848). Then, when the change time is over and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, the final stop symbol (the symbol that is off in FIG. 60 (9)) is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 60 (9) (see S853). As shown in FIG. 60 (9), the display of the first reserved memory number that is the target of the determination at the time of winning in the first reserved memory display unit 18c is continuously displayed in a mode different from the normal (FIG. 60). 60 (9), star display).

  In the above manner, the continuous notice effect is executed in the same effect manner until the variable display based on the start winning that is the subject of determination at the time of winning is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as the variation pattern (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2 shown in FIG. 6). -3, normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3) are determined, a pseudo-series effect may be executed during the variation display of the effect symbol. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of a pseudo-continuous rendering mode. In addition, in FIG. 61, the aspect of an effect screen changes in order of (1) (2) (3) .... In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 61, a case is shown in which pseudo-continuation is performed when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is performed. In the case where the quasi-continuation is performed while the effect symbol variation display is executed in synchronization with the simulating, the quasi-continuation is executed in the same effect manner.

  In the example shown in FIG. 61, first, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), when the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol as shown in FIG. 61 (1). It is assumed that there is a start prize at the first start prize opening 13. In this case, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the updated first reserved memory number designation command based on the newly received start prize (see S218A). In addition, as shown in FIG. 61 (2), the production control microcomputer 100 displays 1 of the first reserved memory number on the first reserved memory display unit 18c based on the received first reserved memory number designation command. Increase (see S653). Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (3), it is assumed that the variation time has ended, the symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the off symbol is stopped and displayed (see S853).

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 receives the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number designation command, and, as shown in FIG. The display of the number of 1 reserved memory is reduced by 1 (see S653), and the next effect design variable display is started. In this case, it is assumed that the production control microcomputer 100 has received a variation pattern command for designating a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. Further, the production control microcomputer 100 determines a chance symbol as a temporary stop symbol of the production symbol based on the reception of the variation pattern command that designates the variation pattern accompanied by the pseudo-ream. Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (5), when the temporary stop timing of the temporary stop symbol comes, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 61 (6). In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (6), a predetermined effect is performed, for example, a display in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol. Note that the predetermined effect performed at the start of re-variation is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 61. For example, a movable member (for example, a character or the like) provided above, below, or on the side of the effect display device 9 is imitated. A movable object having a shape) may be moved at the start of re-variation, or a predetermined lamp may be turned on or blinked at the start of re-variation. Further, for example, the way of starting the variation of the symbol at the start of re-variation may be different from the normal one. For example, in the case where the middle left and right stage design usually starts to change at the same time, the left middle right stage design changes at different timings, or once starts to change upward (or downward). As shown in FIG. 5, the fluctuation may be started downward (or upward). Conversely, in FIG. 61 (5), the way of temporarily stopping the fluctuation of the symbol may be different from the normal one. For example, the symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, right, and middle. The symbols may be temporarily stopped in the order of left, middle, and right. In addition, since it is not a case where a new fluctuation | variation is started, as shown to FIG. 61 (6), the display of the 1st reservation memory number in the 1st reservation memory display part 18c does not change.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (7), the effect symbol variation display is executed (see S1845). As shown in FIG. Is temporarily stopped.

  Next, the production control microcomputer 100 starts re-variation of the production symbol as shown in FIG. 61 (9). In this case, as shown in FIG. 61 (9), a predetermined effect such as a display in which a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of re-variation of the effect symbol is performed.

  In the above-described manner, the temporary stop display of the chance symbol and the re-variation are repeatedly executed to execute a pseudo-continuous effect. As described above, in this embodiment, the continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation” shown in FIG. 57 and the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. 61 are executed in a common effect mode. Therefore, even if the same aspect of the effect is executed, it can give the player a sense of expectation that it may be a continuous notice effect or may be a pseudo-ream, improving the interest in the game. it can.

  Next, the execution timing of the continuous notice effect will be described. FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution timing of the continuous notice effect. In the example shown in FIG. 62, a case where a new start winning is generated during the variation display of the special symbol and the effect symbol is shown. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 62, the case where the continuous notice effect of “change of the variation form at the time of symbol change” is executed is shown as an example, but the execution when the continuous notice effect of other effect modes is executed is shown. The timing is the same.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start prize to the first start prize opening 13 or the second start prize opening 14 (see S311 and S313), it executes a winning effect process (see S217A and S217B). Judgment at the time of winning. When a new start winning is detected in the first start winning opening 13, it is not in the high base state (probability change state or short time state) and is not in the big hit game state (see S215A and S216A). Winning effect processing is executed to determine when winning. Then, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted based on the winning determination result (see S218A and S218B).

  Next, a variation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a reserved storage number designation command (a first reserved memory number designation command or a second reserved memory number designation command) are received, and the next variation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice determination process (see S1802) based on the determination result flag at the time of winning. ”And the chance symbol symbol as the stop symbol of the production symbol (see S1822). Further, the production control microcomputer 100 sets the current reserved memory number (“3” in the example shown in FIG. 62) in the variation counter based on the received reserved memory number designation command (see S1804). Then, when the variation time ends, a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (see S853).

  When starting the next variation display, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the variation counter (see S1811). Then, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 2, as shown in FIG. 62, display is performed in such a manner that the flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change. By performing the predetermined effect (see S1848), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, when the variation time ends, a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (see S853).

  When starting the next variation display, the effect control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the variation counter (see S1811). Then, based on the fact that the value of the variation counter is 1, as shown in FIG. 62, display is performed in such a manner that the flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change. By performing the predetermined effect (see S1848), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, when the variation time ends, a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 62 (see S853).

  Then, when starting the next variation display (variation display subject to determination at the time of winning), the production control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the variation counter (see S1811), Based on the value becoming zero, the set continuous notice execution flag is reset (S1812, S1813), and the continuous notice effect is ended.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 62, the case where the continuous notice effect is performed during the variation display up to the variation display immediately before the variation display subjected to the determination at the time of winning is shown. However, the continuous notice effect may be executed even during the variable display that is the target of determination at the time of winning. In this embodiment, since the continuous notice effect is not executed in the variable display that is the target of determination at the time of winning, both the continuous notice effect and the super reach effect are displayed during one variable display. It is executed to prevent the production from becoming too unnatural (especially, the production is surely prevented from becoming too busy just before the end of the variable display). If a continuous notice effect is to be executed even during the fluctuation display subject to the determination at the time of winning, the continuous notice effect is executed before the super reach effect during the variable display is executed. It is only necessary that the production of super reach be executed after the completion of.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely low, and the gaming state is the probability change state or the short time state (high base state). ), The frequency with which the variable winning ball apparatus is opened is increased. For this reason, when the gaming state is the normal state, it is rare for the game ball to start winning a prize at the second start winning opening 14, and the first special symbol variation display is mainly executed continuously. In addition, when the gaming state is a probable change state or a short time state, the frequency at which the game ball starts and wins at the second start winning opening 14 is increased, and the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. Mainly, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed continuously. However, even if the game state is the normal state, the game ball may start and win at the second start winning port 14 at a low frequency, and the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed. In this case, if there is a start prize for the second start prize opening 14 during the execution of the continuous notice effect based on the determination result at the time of winning with respect to the start prize for the first start prize opening 13, the middle of the continuous notice effect is given. Then, the change display of the second special symbol is interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the change display of the second special symbol interrupts during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect is controlled to be interrupted.

  Hereinafter, the production timing when the continuous notice production is interrupted will be described. 63 and 64 are explanatory diagrams showing the production timing when the continuous notice production is interrupted. Among these, FIG. 63 shows the continuous notice effect that is executed based on the determination of “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13. The production timing in the case of interruption is shown. Further, FIG. 64 shows the production timing when the continuous notice production that is being executed is interrupted based on the fact that it has been judged as “non-reach” in the determination at the time of winning for the start winning to the first starting winning opening 13. Show.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, as an example, a case where a continuous notice effect of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” is executed is shown, but a continuous notice effect of another effect form is executed. The production timing in this case is also the same. In the example shown in FIGS. 63 and 64, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 during execution of the continuous notice effect is determined as non-reach or non-reach as a variable display result.

  First, referring to FIG. 63, the continuous advance notice that is executed based on the determination of “super reach out” or “super reach big hit” in the determination at the time of winning with respect to the start winning at the first starting winning opening 13. The production timing when the production is interrupted will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (see S311), it performs a winning effect process (see S217A) to make a winning determination. If it is determined that “super reach loss” or “super reach jackpot” is reached, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted (see S218A).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a first reserved storage number designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice determination process (see S1802) based on the determination result flag at the time of winning. ”And the chance symbol symbol as the stop symbol of the production symbol (see S1822). Then, when the fluctuation time ends, a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (see S853).

  Further, when starting the next variation display, as shown in FIG. 63, the production control microcomputer 100 displays an aspect in which a flash is emitted above the display screen of the production display device 9 when the production symbol variation starts. By performing a predetermined effect such as (see S1848), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (see S853).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the execution of the continuous notice effect. In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 63, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Therefore, when the second special symbol change display is executed even during execution of the continuous notice effect, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a continuous notice interruption flag as shown in FIG. Control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect (see S1809 and S1810). When the production control microcomputer 100 performs the change display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous notice effect, the other notice effect is displayed during the change display. (See Y of S1823).

  Then, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is finished and the state of the variation display of the first special symbol is restored, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see S1815), and as shown in FIG. Resume the remaining continuous notice effects. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63, when the display of the effect symbol is started in synchronization with the next change display of the first special symbol, the flash appears above the display screen of the effect display device 9. The continuous notice effect is resumed by performing a predetermined effect such as displaying a certain aspect (see S1848). Then, when the fluctuation time ends, a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 63 (see S853).

  Next, referring to FIG. 64, in the case where the continuous notice effect that is being executed is interrupted based on the fact that the winning determination at the first starting winning opening 13 is “non-reach” in the winning determination. The production timing will be described.

  When the game control microcomputer 560 detects a new start winning to the first start winning opening 13 (see S311), it performs a winning effect process (see S217A) to make a winning determination. When it is determined that “non-reach” is detected, a winning determination result designation command is transmitted (see S218A).

  Next, a fluctuation pattern command, a display result designation command, and a first reserved storage number designation command are received, and the next fluctuation display is started. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol change” as the effect form of the continuous notice effect in the continuous notice determination process (see S1802) based on the determination result flag at the time of winning. ”And the chance symbol symbol as the stop symbol of the production symbol (see S1822). Then, the fluctuation time ends and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (see S853).

  Further, when starting the next variation display, as shown in FIG. 64, the effect control microcomputer 100 displays an aspect in which a flash is emitted above the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol variation starts. By performing a predetermined effect such as (see S1848), the continuous notice effect is continuously executed. Then, the fluctuation time ends and a symbol confirmation designation command is received, and the chance symbol symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 64 (see S853).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 64, it is assumed that the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs during the execution of the continuous notice effect. In such a case, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 64, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 sets a flag for interrupting continuous notice as shown in FIG. 64 when the change display of the second special symbol is executed even while the notice of continuous notice is being executed. Control is performed to interrupt the continuous notice effect (see S1809 and S1810). When the production control microcomputer 100 performs the change display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the change display of the second special symbol during the interruption of the continuous notice effect, the other notice effect is displayed during the change display. (See Y of S1823).

  When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is finished and the state returns to the state where the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is executed, the continuous notice interruption flag is reset (see S1815), and the first off continuous notice is executed. The middle flag is reset (see S1816 and S1817), and control is performed to end the continuous notice effect. In other words, when the determination result that is the reason for executing the continuous notice effect is “non-reach”, as shown in FIG. 64, after the continuous notice effect is interrupted, the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. Even if it ends, control is performed so that the continuous notice effect is ended as it is without restarting the continuous notice effect.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, when the game ball is won at the first start winning opening 13, the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed for the first reserved memory. Is determined to be a big hit, and when the game ball starts to win the second start winning opening 14, the display result of the variation display of the second special symbol performed for the second reserved memory becomes the big win. It is determined whether or not. In addition, when one hold memory is stored as the first hold memory or the second hold memory, the winning display for the one hold memory is started until the variable display performed for the one hold memory is started. Based on the determination result of the determination, a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) for the reserved storage is executed using predetermined effect means (for example, effect display device 9) provided in the gaming machine. In this case, in this embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, control is performed so as to limit the execution of the determination at the time of winning based on the starting winning at the first starting winning opening 13. Further, even in the high base state (probability change state or short time state), the control is performed so as to limit the execution of the winning determination based on starting winning at the first starting winning port 13. Therefore, by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the big hit gaming state or the high base state, the big hit is continuously generated by the technical intervention of the player. Thus, it is possible to prevent deliberately aiming for more than the expected number of prize balls.

  For example, as shown in this embodiment, a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, and after the big hit game is finished, a transition is made to a high base state (probability variation state or short time state), and priority is given to the variation display of the second special symbol. In the case of execution, if the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is configured to be executable, the pre-reading notice is executed based on the fact that the game ball has started and won the first start winning opening 13 during the big hit game or the high base state. Therefore, the player recognizes that there is a high possibility that the variation display result of the first special symbol executed after the end of the big hit game or during the advantageous game state will be a big hit. In this embodiment, when the game shifts to the high base state after the big hit game is finished, the start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 becomes easy and the change display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed. From the above, the variation display of the second special symbol is continuously executed so that the start winning to the second starting prize opening 14 is not interrupted, and the expected jackpot as the variation display result of the first special symbol is retained. It becomes possible to aim at the big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Then, a state where two big hits, a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and a big hit based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, are likely to be targeted by the player's technical intervention, more than the expected number There is a risk that the prize ball will be deliberately targeted and the gambling will become too high. Therefore, in this embodiment, by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes a big hit during the big hit gaming state or the high base state, the big hit by the player's technical intervention Are generated in succession to prevent deliberately aiming for more than the expected number of prize balls.

  In this embodiment, the determination at the time of winning is not performed in the big hit gaming state or in the high base state (S215A, S216A, in the case of the big hit gaming state or in the high base state. Shows a case in which the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is not performed and the possibility of winning a big hit is not recognized. However, even in the case of a big winning game state or a high base state, when winning a prize It is also possible to make a determination and transmit a winning determination result designation command, and to determine whether or not the big hit gaming state or the high base state is made on the side of the effect control microcomputer 100 side. When in the gaming state or in the high base state, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is not performed even when the determination result designation command at the time of winning is received. It may be controlled so.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol change display is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is not in the reach state, The first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol, which is the target of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol. In the variable display of the first special symbol, execution of a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous production (continuous notice effect) is impaired due to the change display of the other second special symbol being interrupted during the continuous effect (continuous notice effect). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect mode of the (notification effect) is not suitable. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, it is possible to prevent the contents of the effects from becoming unnatural without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous effects (continuous notice effects). it can. In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol that is not in the reach state, the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is performed as it is. By ending, it is possible to notify the player early that it will not reach the reach state.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the second special symbol variation display that is not a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous presentation (continuous notice effect) for the first special symbol variation display in the reach state. Sometimes, in the variable display of the second special symbol, the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is prohibited, while the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the change display of the second special symbol is finished. In the variable display of the first special symbol stored in the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol, the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed. In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol that is a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variable display of the first special symbol in the reach state, the second special symbol of the second special symbol is displayed. The first special symbol in the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol that is the target of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the end of the variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol. In the variable display, continuous execution (continuous notice effect) is prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous production (continuous notice effect) is impaired due to the change display of the other second special symbol being interrupted during the continuous effect (continuous notice effect). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect mode of the (notification effect) is not suitable. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, it is possible to prevent the contents of the effects from becoming unnatural without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous effects (continuous notice effects). it can. Further, if the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed after the end of the display of the variation of the second special symbol, it will be determined that the reach state will be established, and the interest in the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the continuous performance (continuous notice performance) being continued unnecessarily after the big hit.

  Also, according to this embodiment, when the second special symbol variation display that does not become a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous presentation (continuous notice effect) for the first special symbol variation display that is a big hit. In the variable display of the second special symbol, the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is prohibited, while the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the change display of the second special symbol is completed. In the variable display of the first special symbol in the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol, the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed. Further, when the variation display of the second special symbol that is a big hit is started during the execution of the continuous presentation (continuous notice effect) for the variation display of the first special symbol that is a big hit, the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. The first special symbol of the first reserved memory that is started before the variable display of the first special symbol that is the target of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) executed after the display and the variable display of the second special symbol is finished. In the variable display, the execution of a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is prohibited. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the continuity of the continuous production (continuous notice effect) is impaired due to the change display of the other second special symbol being interrupted during the continuous effect (continuous notice effect). It is possible to prevent a situation in which the effect mode of the (notification effect) is not suitable. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol indicators 8a and 8b, it is possible to prevent the contents of the effects from becoming unnatural without increasing the processing burden when performing the continuous effects (continuous notice effects). it can. Further, if the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) is resumed after the end of the display of the variation of the second special symbol, the expectation of a big hit increases, so the interest in the game can be improved. Further, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the continuous performance (continuous notice performance) being continued unnecessarily after the big hit.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variation display of the second special symbol is started during the execution of the continuous effect (continuous notice effect) for the variation display of the first special symbol, the notice effect is executed. Ban. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a continuous effect (continuous notice effect) and another notice effect are executed in a mixed manner and confuse the player.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed based on the start winning at the first start winning opening 13, the second start based on the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 is performed. Compared to the case where the special symbol variation display is executed, it is decided to make a small hit at a high rate. Therefore, by suppressing the occurrence frequency of the small hit game based on the start winning to the second start winning opening 14, it is understood that the game was a small hit game despite expecting a sudden positive change big hit game in the high base state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a situation in which the player is discouraged more than necessary is prevented, and a situation in which the player is disadvantaged more than necessary can be prevented.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern type determination table for detachment to change the variation pattern type of the effect symbol to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with super reach, It is determined as one of a plurality of variation pattern types including a variation pattern type that does not include a variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. In this case, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. . Also, in the variation pattern type determination table for loss, different determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types including variation patterns (normal reach and non-reach) other than super reach depending on the total number of pending storage. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a variation pattern with super reach from being common among a plurality of variation pattern types. Therefore, in the case where a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed based on the determination that the super reach is reached, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies depending on the number of reserved memories. In addition, the distribution of the variation pattern with super reach and the variation pattern other than that can be easily changed at the design stage.

  For example, in this embodiment, it is premised that the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, and the variation display is performed according to the determined variation pattern. If the read random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) includes a random value corresponding to a super reach with high reliability for the big hit, the variation display before the variation display for the super reach is executed A continuous notice effect is executed. In this case, if the deviation variation pattern type determination table is designed as in this embodiment, when a continuous notice effect is executed, a change with a super reach corresponding to the noticed change pattern type is always performed. Since the display is executed, a notice effect corresponding to the variation pattern type can be executed in advance.

  For example, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-278663, it is described that a variation pattern type is first determined and then one of the variation patterns included in the variation pattern type is determined. There are variation patterns that are included between a plurality of variation pattern types. Therefore, even if the continuous notice effect is executed in advance, other effects such as normal reach may be executed, which may cause distrust to the player. If you try not to give distrust to the player, you will be able to perform only the notice effect that the reach will occur at the most (you can not give a more reliable notice than Super Reach etc.) ), The effect of the notice effect will be significantly reduced. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a common determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute a continuous notice effect with higher reliability, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the notice effect without giving distrust to the player.

  In addition, the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-278663 includes a variation pattern that exists in common among the variation pattern types. For this reason, the work for distributing a specific fluctuation pattern such as a super reach fluctuation pattern and other fluctuation patterns at the design stage becomes complicated. That is, even if it is desired to change only the selection ratio of a specific fluctuation pattern without changing the selection ratio of each fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation pattern type, the selection ratios within a plurality of fluctuation pattern types Therefore, the appearance rate of the variation pattern differs between the variation pattern types. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, a specific variation pattern such as a variation pattern of super reach and other variation patterns are configured not to exist in common among a plurality of variation pattern types. The appearance rate of the variation pattern can be easily changed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for detachment has different determination values depending on the total number of pending storages for variation pattern types including variation patterns (normal reach and non-reach) other than super reach. Assigned. For example, in this embodiment, only the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening (for shortening) 135B (see FIG. 10B) selected when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is used. A variation pattern type (non-reach CA2-3) including (non-reach PA1-2) is selected. Therefore, when the number of reserved memories (in this example, the total number of reserved memories) is large, the operating rate can be improved by shortening the fluctuation time by averaging. In other words, if a lot of variable display with a long fluctuation time such as super reach is executed while the reserved memory is accumulated, the reserved memory is not easily digested, and there is a possibility that useless reserved memory is generated. When the number is large, the operating time is improved by shortening the fluctuation time on average. On the other hand, when there is a small amount of reserved memory, if the fluctuation time is short, the reserved memory is quickly consumed and the variable display is interrupted. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the number of reserved memories is large, the shortening variation is not performed, so that the variation time is averaged and lengthened so that the variation display is not easily interrupted. Therefore, in this embodiment, inconsistency does not occur depending on the number of reserved storages, while the variable display is not easily interrupted.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, after changing the display of the effect symbol to the time when the display result is derived and displayed until the display result is derived and displayed, the effect symbol is displayed again after being temporarily stopped. A plurality of types of quasi-continuous variation patterns (non-reach PA1-4, normal PB2-1, normal PB2-2, super PA3-1, super PA3-2, normal PB2-3, which execute re-variation once or multiple times, Normal PB2-4, super PA3-3, super PA3-4, and special PG1-3). Then, the pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed in the same manner as when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. For this reason, even when an effect of the same effect mode is executed, it is possible to expect the possibility of both a case where a pseudo-ream effect is executed and a case where a pre-reading notice is executed. Can improve interest in

  Further, according to this embodiment, after one reserved memory is stored as the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory, a plurality of effect symbols until the variable display performed by the one reserved memory is started. The pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed over the fluctuation display. Then, the chance effect symbol is derived and displayed as a variation display result of the effect symbol until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started, and the next effect until the variable display performed by the one hold memory is started. A predetermined effect (for example, display in such a manner that a flash shines above the display screen of the effect display device 9 at the start of effect symbol variation) is performed when the symbol variation display is started. Therefore, it is necessary to make time adjustments, such as stopping and displaying the chance symbol early, when performing a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) of the effect mode using the derivation display of the chance symbol and execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to eliminate such a situation that the process of deriving and displaying the chance symbol and the process of executing the predetermined effect overlap to cause a lack of processing. For example, in order to perform an effect similar to the above, during a single fluctuation display, the chance symbol is first stopped and displayed, and then a predetermined effect (for example, the display screen of the effect display device 9 when the effect symbol starts to change). If the variable display is terminated by executing the display of a mode in which the flash is shining above, the continuous notice effect in the effect mode similar to that in FIG. 57 can be executed. However, if such control is performed, processing such as temporarily stopping display of the chance symbol is required slightly earlier than the end time of the variable display, and time adjustment until the end time of the variable display becomes necessary. Therefore, in this embodiment, by performing the predetermined effect at the start of the next variable display during the continuous notice effect, the continuous notice effect of the effect mode shown in FIG. It is possible to execute without doing.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 changes the second special symbol when the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the second special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern type is determined according to a common process when displaying. The game control microcomputer 560 is common when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol indicator 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol indicator 8b. According to the process, the variation pattern of the effect symbol is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. Therefore, in a gaming machine equipped with a plurality of special symbol displays, the capacity of a storage area for storing a program and data for determining a variation pattern can be reduced.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 has two rounds of big hit, whether it is a big hit or not, and a 16-round big hit, a normal big hit, a probability variable big hit A, or a sudden hit big hit B. It is determined before the derivation display of the display result which of the sudden probability change big hit. Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the 16-round big hit and the 2-round big hit are different at different ratios. And decide which of the transitions. Therefore, the game value of the game state to be transferred can be varied depending on which special symbol variation display is executed, and the progress of the game can be diversified.

  Further, according to this embodiment, at the timing of the start winning prize before the start of the change, the game control microcomputer 560 determines in advance whether or not the change pattern of the effect pattern becomes a change pattern with super reach. . Then, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that it will become super reach before starting the variable display of the production symbols determined to be super reach based on the determination at the time of winning when super reach is reached. An effect to be notified can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to notify that it will be super reach before the change display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 determines the variation pattern by determining the variation pattern type using the variation pattern type determination table for detachment. In this case, in the deviation variation pattern type determination table, a common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach regardless of the total number of pending storages. . Also, in the variation pattern type determination table for loss, different determination values are assigned to the variation pattern types including variation patterns (normal reach and non-reach) other than super reach depending on the total number of pending storage. For this reason, as the total number of pending storage increases, the ratio of the judgment value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation display time is assigned, so that the operation rate of the variation display decreases. Can be prevented as much as possible.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram of the determination value allocation state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern type determination table 135B for loss shown in FIG. 10B is used, and the total number of pending storages is 0 to 2 (3 or less). In this case, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A shown in FIG. 10A is used (see S96 to S98). As shown in FIG. 62, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the ratio is less (normal reach, super reach) than when the total number of pending storages is 0-2. When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, as shown in FIG. 10B, the non-reach CA 2-2 variation pattern type is selected and the non-reach PA 1-2 is a variation pattern of shortened variation. Since the average fluctuation time is shortened as the total number of pending storage increases, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operating rate of fluctuation display is reduced as much as possible.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 65, regardless of the total number of pending storage, a common determination value (230˜) is used for the variation pattern type with super reach (super reach A, super reach B). 251) is allocated. Therefore, at the time of starting winning, it is possible to easily determine in advance whether or not it will be super reach if only the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to notify that it becomes super reach before the change display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  In this embodiment, the case where the distribution of the determination values in the variation pattern type determination table for divergence is different for the two types of whether the total pending storage number is 0 to 2 or 3 or more is shown. The method of differentiating the determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the distribution may be changed more finely and stepwise according to the total number of pending storage. In this case, for example, the variation pattern type determination table for deviation when the total pending storage number is 0, 1 and the deviation for the total pending storage number 2, the total pending storage number 3 and the total pending storage number 4 A variation pattern type determination table may be prepared in advance, and the distribution of the variation pattern type with reach and the variation pattern type of the shortened variation may be further varied in stages. Further, the present invention is not limited to such an example, and various combinations of the deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared in advance can be considered. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (ie, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0 to 2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4, and so on may be used.

  In this embodiment, a completely common determination value (230 to 251) is assigned to the variation pattern type accompanied by super reach (super reach A, super reach B) regardless of the total number of pending storage. However, the determination value for super reach in one of the deviation variation pattern type determination table may include the determination value for super reach in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. . FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram illustrating another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 66, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the determination values 230 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach, whereas the total number of pending storages 0 to In the case of 2, determination values 200 to 251 are assigned to the variation pattern types with super reach. However, even in such a case, when the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it becomes easy to become super reach beforehand. Can be determined. Therefore, it is possible to notify that it becomes super reach before the change display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, among the determination values 0 to 199 assigned to the non-reach variation pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the range of the determination values 100 to 199 Is not included in the range 0 to 99 of the determination value assigned to the non-reach variation pattern type when the total number of pending storages is 0 to 2. On the other hand, the range 230 to 251 of the determination value assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach when the total number of reserved storage is 3 or more is a super value when the total number of reserved storage is 0 to 2. All of the determination value ranges 200 to 251 assigned to the variation pattern types with reach are included. Therefore, when the value of the extracted variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) is in the range of at least 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning a prize, it can be easily determined in advance that it will be super reach.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 66, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more. The determination values 200 to 229 are assigned to the variation pattern types with normal reach, and the ranges to which the determination values are assigned to the variation patterns with normal reach are not overlapped. The range of determination values assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach may be overlapped between the case and three or more cases. For example, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the determination values 100 to 199 are assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach, and when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type with normal reach is assigned. On the other hand, the determination values 180 to 229 may be assigned. Even in the case of such a configuration, some of the determination values 180 to 229 out of the determination values 180 to 229 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Only the range of 199 is included in the range of determination values 100 to 199 assigned to the variation pattern type with normal reach when the total number of pending storages is 0 to 2.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which a variation pattern type determination table for deviation is configured as a variation pattern type for all of the variation patterns with super reach, but for each type of super reach (for example, super reach A and The variation pattern type may be divided into super reach B). FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing still another example of the determination value assignment state in the deviation variation pattern type determination table.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 67, determination values 230 to 237 are assigned to the variation pattern type with super reach A regardless of the total number of pending storage, and the variation pattern type with super reach B is assigned. Determination values 237 to 251 are assigned. However, even in such a case, if the value of the extracted random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) is in the range of 230 to 251 at the time of starting winning, it is easily determined in advance that it will be super reach. can do. Therefore, it is possible to notify that it becomes super reach before the change display corresponding to the start winning, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Further, even when the deviation variation pattern type determination table is configured as shown in FIG. 67, the distribution of the determination values of super reach A and super reach B may be different for each table. As in the modification shown in FIG. 5, for example, the determination value for super reach A and B in one deviation variation pattern type determination table is the determination value for super reach A and B in the other variation pattern type determination table for deviation. It may be included. Moreover, you may comprise so that allocation of the judgment value with respect to the super reach A and the super reach B may overlap partially between tables. This can be similarly applied to both this embodiment and each modification shown in this embodiment.

  In addition, according to this embodiment, the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach includes the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity. Therefore, even when the effect of notifying that it will be a super reach is not executed, the display of fluctuation with pseudo-ream can increase the expectation of becoming a big hit gaming state, and the interest in gaming Can be improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when determining a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, when the total number of pending storage is small, In comparison, a variation pattern having a large number of pseudo-variation re-variation execution times is determined. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a variable display accompanied by a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variation executions is performed when the total number of reserved storage is large (when the stored storage is accumulated), and the operation rate of the variable display Can be further prevented.

  FIG. 68 shows the assignment state of the determination value in the variation pattern type determination table for deviation when looking at the variation pattern type including the variation pattern with pseudo-continuity as the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. It is explanatory drawing shown. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the determination value is in the range of 215 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern type of normal CA2-6 is selected (see FIG. 10B). Then, as shown in FIG. 68, the variation pattern of the normal PB2-1 with the pseudo-continuous with the number of revariations of 2 is selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, normal CA2 based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 as the variation pattern type including the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach. A variation pattern type of −5 is selected (see FIG. 10A). Then, as shown in FIG. 68, the variation pattern of the normal PB2-2 with the pseudo-ream with three revariations is selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6).

  As shown in FIG. 68, even if the effect of notifying that it will be super reach is not executed, there is a case where a fluctuating display accompanied by a pseudo-ream may be performed, so that a sense of expectation for becoming a big hit gaming state is increased. Can improve the interest of the game. As shown in FIG. 68, when the variable display with pseudo-continuations is performed, when the total number of pending storages is as small as 0 to 2, the variable display with three re-variations of pseudo-continuations is executed. When the number of pending storages is as large as 3 or more, a variable display with a pseudo-continuation with a small number of re-variation times of 2 is executed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent a situation in which fluctuation display with a pseudo-ream with a large number of re-variation execution times is frequently performed when the total number of pending storage is large (when the reserved storage is accumulated), It is possible to further prevent a situation in which the operating rate of the fluctuation display is lowered.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with pseudo-continuity and a variation without pseudo-continuation as a specific variation display pattern. (See super CA2-7 in FIGS. 6 and 12), but the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 is only accompanied by super reach. And a variation pattern that does not involve pseudo-continuations may be included. Furthermore, even when a variation pattern with pseudo-ream is used together with super reach, a range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern that has only super reach and does not involve pseudo ream as a specific variation display pattern. Variation pattern types that include only quasi-continuous and super-reach and quasi-continuous variation patterns, normal reach and quasi-continuous variation pattern types, and non-reach and variability pattern types that involve quasi-continuation. May be assigned to a range other than the determination values 230 to 251 as a variation pattern type including a variation display pattern other than a specific variation display pattern.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when a variation pattern with pseudo-continuity is determined as a variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is a predetermined number or more (in this embodiment, four times). It is possible to determine a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream. In addition, when a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity is determined as a variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach, the number of re-variation executions is less than a predetermined number (two or three in this embodiment). It is possible to determine the variation pattern with ream. Therefore, by executing a quasi-ream whose number of re-variations is greater than or equal to a predetermined number (for example, 4 times), the player can have a sense of expectation that it may become super reach. Can be improved.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing an assignment state of determination values in the deviation variation pattern type determination table when attention is paid to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with pseudo-continuations. In this embodiment, the super CA 2-7 variation pattern type with super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storage (see FIG. 10). . Then, as shown in FIG. 68, super PA3-1 to super PA3-2, which is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with four re-variations, may be selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6). On the other hand, when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-6 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 215 to 229 (FIG. 10 ( B)). Then, as shown in FIG. 68, a normal PB2-1 that is a variation pattern with a pseudo-continuity with two re-variations may be selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6). When the total pending storage number is 0 to 2, the variation pattern type of normal CA 2-5 that does not become super reach is selected based on the determination value being in the range of 170 to 229 (FIG. 10). (See (A)). Then, as shown in FIG. 68, the normal PB2-2, which is a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo-continuation with three revariations, may be selected (see FIGS. 12 and 6).

  As shown in FIG. 69, by executing the pseudo-ream with the number of re-variations of 4 or more, the player can have a sense of expectation that it may become super reach, and the interest in the game is increased. Can be improved.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 69, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a pseudo variation of 4 times as a specific variation display pattern. A variation pattern with reams is included in a range other than a specific variation display pattern, and a variation pattern with two or three re-variations is included in a range other than that. Although the display pattern and a variation display pattern other than a specific variation display pattern include a variation pattern with a pseudo-series that does not overlap the number of re-variations, the number of re-variations of the pseudo-series is duplicated. May be. For example, the variation pattern type with super reach assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251 includes a variation pattern with re-variation 3 to 5 pseudo-continuations as a specific variation display pattern. It may be configured such that a variation pattern with one to three re-variations is included as a variation display pattern other than the specific variation display pattern in a range other than.

  It should be noted that the variation pattern with any type of super reach within the range to which the variation pattern type with super reach in the variation pattern type determination table for loss is assigned (the range to which the determination values 230 to 251 are assigned). The ratio of allocation and the rate of allocation of variation patterns with pseudo-continuations are not limited to those shown in this embodiment. FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of assignment in a range in which a variation pattern type with super reach is assigned.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), not all types of reach are allocated, but among the reach having high reliability for some jackpots (for example, super reach C in super reach A to C). Those with pseudo-continuations and having a large number of pseudo-continuations (for example, four times) may be collectively assigned to the range of determination values 230 to 251. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), regardless of the type of reach, all reach (for example, super reach A to super reach C) is accompanied by a pseudo series, and the number of pseudo series. Those having a large number may be assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251 collectively. Furthermore, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), in addition to the fluctuation pattern of only super reach (for example, super reach A and not accompanied by pseudo-ream), the pseudo-ream is associated with the number of pseudo reams. Many variation patterns may be assigned to a range of determination values 230 to 251 as specific variation patterns.

  In this embodiment, the case of using two types of reach, that is, super reach A and super reach B, is shown as super reach. You may comprise so that a super reach may be performed. For example, when the super reach C is configured to be executable in addition to the super reach A and B as shown in FIG. 70, the game control microcomputer 560 first executes the process according to the same processing as in this embodiment. From the big hit variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B and the loss variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the super CA3- 3 and Super CA2-7 are determined. Then, the super CA 3-3 and the super CA 2-7, which are the variation patterns for super reach, are configured to include variation patterns with super reach A to C, respectively, and the super reach is determined based on the determined variation pattern types. A variation pattern involving any one of A to C may be determined.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when it is determined to be a big hit, it is a fluctuation pattern with a super reach at a higher rate than when it is determined not to be a big hit. For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when it is determined to be out of place, the determination value is assigned only to a narrow range of 230 to 251 with respect to the super reach, whereas FIGS. As shown in (2), when it is determined to be a big hit, a determination value is assigned to a super reach over a wide range of 150 to 251 or 80 to 251. Therefore, the expectation to the big hit gaming state when the variable display with super reach is performed can be enhanced, and the interest in the game can be further improved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, it is determined that the variation pattern other than the variation pattern with super reach is a variation pattern with normal reach or a non-reach variation pattern. Therefore, even when the variable display with super reach is not performed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that the variable display with normal reach may be executed and enter into a big hit gaming state. Further improvement can be achieved.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 sets the variation pattern type to include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach or a variation pattern type not including a variation pattern with super reach. Decide on. Then, when it is determined that the variation display pattern type of the effect symbol is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach, it is determined that the variation pattern of the effect symbol is a variation pattern with super reach. Therefore, the distribution between the variation pattern with super reach and the variation pattern other than that can be easily changed at the design stage only by changing the distribution of the variation pattern type.

Next, main effects obtained by the embodiment described above will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 46 and FIGS. 52 to 56, S1910, S1923 in FIG. 47, S1989 in FIG. 48, etc., a big hit display such as a predetermined round of the big hit gaming state or the ending of the big hit gaming state In the specified period from the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the jackpot display result has been derived to the end of the jackpot gaming state and the start of the first variable display, without notification at the timing when the result is derived The promotion effect which notifies that it shifts to a certain change state is performed by performing predetermined effects, such as none (promotion of ending), a story effect, a chance notification effect, and a complete notification effect. Further, as shown in S1910, S1915, S1916, S1923 in FIG. 47, S1980, S1985, S1989 in FIG. 48, S704, S706, S707 in FIG. 49, S714 in FIG. If the winning determination result that is determined to be a big win is included, it will not be notified at the timing when the big hit display result is derived, such as the seventh round of the big hit gaming state or the ending of the big hit gaming state, In the specific period from the start of the jackpot gaming state based on the display result being derived until the end of the jackpot gaming state and the start of the first variable display, it is a jackpot by performing the same effect as the promotion effect The on-hold jackpot notification effect for notifying that the winning determination result is included is performed. As a result, when the player is in a jackpot gaming state in which the player feels joy, these two types of notifications are performed in the same production, so that the player only has to pay attention to the same production and is advantageous to the player. Since it can be easily recognized by the production without being confused as to whether or not the player will be in a special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the big hit gaming state is reached.

  (2) As for the promotion effect, as shown in FIG. 46 (B), there is a ratio that the ratio of the effect pattern in which the promotion effect is not performed during the ending is higher than the ratio of the effect pattern performed in the ending. 90% (total of 90% of story, chance announcement, and complete announcement), and the promotion performance is executed more frequently during the round than at the ending. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the on-hold big hit notification effect may be executed during the round when it is determined to be executed by the fifth round. As shown, when it is determined to be executed from the sixth round to the fifteenth round, a notification effect is performed only at the ending time. Therefore, the promotion effect has a higher ratio of being executed during the round than the on-hold jackpot notification effect, and a lower ratio of execution at the ending. In addition, when the chance notification is executed as a promotion effect, it is executed at any of the seventh, eleventh, and sixteenth rounds or at the time of ending, but it is executed as an on-holding jackpot notification effect. Is executed only in the seventh round as shown in S706. Therefore, the ratio of executing the chance notification during the seventh round is higher in the on-hold jackpot notification effect than in the promotion effect. The complete notification is executed in any of the fourth, eighth, eleventh, and sixteenth rounds when it is executed as a promotion effect. As shown, it is executed only in the eighth round. Therefore, the on-hold big hit notification effect has a higher rate of executing the complete notification during the eighth round than the promotion effect. Thereby, when the same effect is performed in the promotion effect and the in-holding jackpot notification effect, the player can predict which notification is performed according to the performed timing.

  (3) As shown in S1976 of FIG. 48, when the promotion effect is performed, since the same effect is restricted to be performed as the on-hold jackpot notification effect, the same effect is repeatedly executed a plurality of times. This can prevent the useless production.

  (4) The variation display of the second special symbol performed by the second reserved memory is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol performed by the first reserved memory as shown in S52 to S54 of FIG. 46 and 52 to 56 on the condition that the right stored in the second holding storage means during the specific gaming state is determined as the specific display result by the second determination means. 47, S1910 and S1923 in FIG. 47, S1989 in FIG. 48, and the like, when the winning determination result determined as a big win is included as the right stored as the second reserved memory, 7 rounds or a big win based on the fact that the jackpot display result is derived without notification at the timing when the jackpot display result is derived, such as when ending the jackpot game state In the specific period from the start of the gaming state to the end of the jackpot gaming state and the start of the first fluctuation display, the winning judgment result to be a jackpot is included by performing the same effect as the promotion effect The on-hold big hit notification effect is announced. As a result, when the player is in a jackpot gaming state in which the player feels joy, these two types of notifications are performed in the same production, so that the player only has to pay attention to the same production and is advantageous to the player. Since it can be easily recognized by the production without being confused as to whether or not the player will be in a special state, it is possible to improve the interest of the player when the big hit gaming state is reached. In addition, when the player recognizes that the display result of the first special symbol may be a big hit result during the big hit gaming state, when the player is controlled to the high base state after the big hit gaming state, Aiming only at the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol in which the variable display is executed preferentially until the execution of the fluctuation display due to the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol, which has already recognized the possibility of a jackpot display result. The jackpot gaming state is continuously generated (more specifically, the jackpot gaming state is generated by the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol, and the possibility that the jackpot display result is obtained after the end of the first special symbol is recognized. It is conceivable that more than the expected number of prize balls will be deliberately targeted by technical intervention in which a big hit gaming state is generated again when the starting condition is satisfied. On the other hand, only the second reserved memory in which the variable display is preferentially executed is notified by the on-hold big hit notification effect, so that the player is technically involved without digesting the right of the notification. It is possible to reduce the room for making it possible.

  (5) When the player recognizes that the display result of the first special symbol may become a big hit result during the big hit gaming state, the player is controlled when the high base state is controlled after the big hit gaming state ends. Has already recognized the possibility of a jackpot display result, only the satisfaction of the start condition of the second special symbol, which is executed with priority by the time the variation display due to the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol is executed. A big hit gaming state is generated continuously by hitting the target (more specifically, a first special symbol that recognizes the possibility that a big hit gaming state is generated when the start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied and a jackpot display result is obtained after completion) It is conceivable that more than the expected number of prize balls will be deliberately targeted by a technical intervention of generating a big hit gaming state again when the starting condition is established. On the other hand, since it is controlled not to shift to S217A when it is determined to be Y in S216A of FIG. 17, in the big hit gaming state, the determination by the effect process at the time of winning performed for the continuous notice is performed for the first start winning prize. Execution is restricted. This makes it possible to continuously generate the jackpot gaming state by the technical intervention of the player by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the jackpot display result during the jackpot gaming state. Thus, it is possible to prevent deliberately aiming for more than the expected number of prize balls.

  (6) When the player recognizes that the display result of the first special symbol may be a big hit result during the probability change state and the time reduction state, the player has already made a big hit when the probability change state and the time reduction state are controlled. Aiming only at the establishment of the start condition of the second special symbol in which the variable display is executed preferentially until the execution of the fluctuation display by the establishment of the start condition of the first special symbol recognizing the possibility of a display result. The jackpot gaming state is continuously generated at (In more detail, the starting condition of the first special symbol which recognizes the possibility that the big hit gaming state is generated by the establishment of the starting condition of the second special symbol and the jackpot display result is obtained after the end. It is conceivable that more than the expected number of award balls will be deliberately aimed at by technical intervention in which a big hit gaming state is generated again when is established. On the other hand, since it is controlled not to shift to S217A when it is determined as Y in S215A of FIG. 17, the execution of the determination by the winning effect processing performed for the continuous notice is limited in the probability variation state and the short time state. The As a result, by making it impossible to recognize the possibility that the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol will be a big hit display result during the probability changing state and the short time state, the big hit gaming state is continuously made by the technical intervention of the player. It is possible to prevent deliberately aiming for more than the expected number of prize balls.

  (7) In S301 of FIG. 16, the gaming control microcomputer 560 uses the variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B for losing shown in FIG. The change pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of change pattern types including the change pattern type including the change pattern type including the change pattern with super reach. Then, the variation pattern of the effect design is determined from the variation patterns included in the determined variation pattern type. As shown in FIG. 10, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B show common determination values (230 to 135) for variation pattern types including variation patterns with superreach regardless of the total number of pending storages. 251) is allocated. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B indicate that the variation pattern types including the variation patterns other than the super reach (normal reach or non-reach) correspond to the total number of pending storages. Different judgment values are assigned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a variation pattern with super reach from being common among a plurality of variation pattern types. Therefore, in the case where a pre-reading notice (continuous notice effect) is executed based on the determination that the super reach is reached, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies depending on the number of reserved memories. Further, as shown in S95 to S98 of FIG. 22, the deviation variation pattern type determination is performed so that the ratio of the determination value to the variation pattern type including the variation pattern having a short variation display time increases as the total number of stored pending memory increases. By selecting a row for the table (for shortening) 135B, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operating rate of the variable display is reduced as much as possible.

Next, modifications, feature points, and the like of the embodiment described above are listed below.
(1) In the embodiment described above, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, which are two special symbol displays, are provided, and the two special symbols are variably displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration may be adopted in which one special symbol display is provided instead of two special symbol displays, and one special symbol is variably displayed. In the case of adopting such a configuration, the special symbol change display on the special symbol display is executed in accordance with each of the winning at the first starting winning port 13 and the winning at the second starting winning port 14. You can do so. In other words, various controls for causing the first special symbol display 8a to execute the first special symbol based on the winning of the first start winning port 13 and the second special symbol display based on the winning of the second starting winning port 14. The various controls for causing the second special symbol to be executed by the device 8b may be applied to the variation display of the special symbol in one special symbol display.

  (2) In the above-described embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. May be mounted on one substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted, and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27R, 27L, etc.) are mounted. Alternatively, two substrates, the second effect control substrate, may be provided.

  (3) In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 is connected to another board (for example, FIG. (Sound / lamp board having a function of a circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and a function mounted on the lamp driver board 35 and a function of a circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). An effect control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command received directly from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in response to commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  (4) In the above-described embodiment, as an example of the transition to the first gaming state or the second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state, An example is shown in which the first gaming state is the time-short state that is not the probability variation state, and the second game state is the probability variation state (including the time-short state). Not limited to this, the first gaming state may be a normal state that is neither the short-time state nor the probable change state, and the second gaming state may be a probable change state (including the short-time state). In addition, the first gaming state may be a normal state that is neither the short-time state nor the certainty change state, and the second gaming state may be the short-time state. That is, the relationship between the first gaming state and the second gaming state may be any relationship as long as the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.

  (5) In the above-described embodiment, the promotion effect for notifying the transition to the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot gaming state is executed only during the round, both during the round and during the ending, or only during the ending. showed that. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing for executing the promotion effect may be other timings such as, for example, executing the promotion effect between rounds. After the jackpot display result is derived, the second game It may be executed at any timing as long as it is a predetermined timing until transition to the state.

  (6) In the above-described embodiment, the on-hold jackpot notification effect executed for the data stored and stored during the jackpot gaming state is only during the round, both during the round and at the ending, or at the ending. An example to run only was shown. However, this is not limiting, and the timing for executing such a pending jackpot notification effect is, for example, the one that executes the pending jackpot notification effect between rounds, or after the end of the jackpot gaming state and the first fluctuation display Other timings may be used, such as those that execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect before the start, from the start of the specific game state to the end of the specific game state and the start of the first variation display The specific timing may be executed at any timing.

  (7) In the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which all of the plurality of effect patterns performed as the on-hold jackpot notification effect are the same effect as the effect pattern of the promotion effect. In this case, the same effect as the effect pattern of the promotion effect may be completely the same effect as shown in the embodiment, and it is slightly different from the effect pattern of the promotion effect, but the players are different. An effect may be substantially the same effect pattern that is identified as the same effect without being noticed. As such substantially the same effect pattern, all of the plurality of effect patterns performed as the on-hold internal jackpot notification effect may be substantially the same effect pattern. A part may be a completely identical production pattern, and the remaining part may be a substantially identical production pattern.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which all of the plurality of effect patterns performed as the on-hold jackpot notification effect are the same effect as the effect pattern of the promotion effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for some of the plurality of effect patterns performed as the on-hold big hit notification effect, an effect pattern different from the effect pattern of the promotion effect may be used. Further, among the plurality of effect patterns performed as the on-hold big hit notification effect, some similar effect patterns may be used, although they are not the same as the effect pattern of the promotion effect.

  (9) In the above-described embodiment, an example has been shown in which the target whether or not to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect as the pre-reading notice effect when the jackpot gaming state is reached is only the second special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special symbol may be added as an object as to whether or not to execute the on-hold big hit notification effect as the pre-reading notice effect when the big hit gaming state is entered.

  (10) In the above-described embodiment, it is determined whether or not the on-hold jackpot notification effect is executed at the same rate (70%) in the first prefetch effect process in FIG. 49 and the second prefetch effect process in FIG. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be determined whether or not to execute the on-hold jackpot notification effect at different rates in the first prefetch effect process and the second prefetch effect process.

  (11) The process for determining whether or not to execute the promotion effect may be performed only on the game control microcomputer 560 side, or only on the effect control microcomputer 100 side. Good.

  (12) The embodiment described above is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of winning balls, but responds to detection of winning balls by enclosing gaming balls. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  (13) The embodiment described above can also be applied to an apparatus such as a game machine that simulates the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The program and data for realizing the above-described embodiment are not limited to a form distributed and provided to a computer apparatus or the like by a detachable recording medium, but a storage apparatus that the computer apparatus or the like has in advance. You may take the form that is distributed by pre-installing. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter. The game embodiment is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  (14) It should be understood that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine, 8a 1st special symbol display, 8b 2nd special symbol display, 9 production | presentation display device, 13 1st start winning opening, 14 2nd starting winning opening, 20 special variable winning ball apparatus, 31 game control Board (main board), 56 CPU, 560 Game control microcomputer, 80 effect control board, 100 effect control microcomputer, 101 effect control CPU.

Claims (1)

A variable display means for performing variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, each of which can be identified in accordance with the establishment of the starting condition, and the display result of the identification information derived to the variable display means is a predetermined specific display result; When it becomes, it controls to the specific gaming state advantageous to the player, and after the specific gaming state ends, it shifts to the first gaming state or the second gaming state advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. A gaming machine,
A holding storage means for storing information for performing variable display of the identification information as a holding storage when the starting condition is satisfied;
Pre-determining means for determining whether or not to display the identification information as a specific display result when starting the variable display of the identification information based on the hold storage ;
When the start condition is satisfied, a determination is made when the start condition is satisfied that determines whether the display result by the variable display of the identification information performed by the hold storage stored in the hold storage means becomes the specific display result. Means,
The transition to the second gaming state is not notified at the timing when the specific display result is derived, and the specific gaming state ends first from the start of the specific gaming state based on the specific display result being derived. Transition notifying means for notifying by performing a predetermined effect within a specific period until the change display is started,
As the hold memories stored in the hold memory means, if it contains the said hold memory is a determination result that the specific display result by the start condition is satisfied when the determination means, the predetermined effect in said specific time period The on-hold specific display result notifying means for notifying by performing the same effect ,
On the condition that the predetermined effect is performed in the transition notification means, the control for restricting the on-hold specific display result notification means from performing the same effect as the predetermined effect; and the on-hold specific display result notification And a restriction means for performing at least one of control for restricting the transition notification means from performing the predetermined effect on condition that the same effect as the predetermined effect is performed in the means. To play.

Images